Library  - ^ 

UNIVERSITY  OF 
ILLINOIS  L :RAm 


3S^p 


AT  URBANA-CnAiVlPAi-^.  • 

BOOKSTACKS  / ^ 

THE  PROPERTY  mI. 


CHICAGO 


OF  TH  E 


ATHENAEUM, 


INSTITUTED  OCT.  17,  1871. 

Rooms, 


REGULATIONS  OF  THE  LIBRARY. 


i.  To  encourage  a general  use  of  the  Library,  the 
members  will  at  all  times  have  free  access  to  the  shelves, 
and  may  take  down  any  volumes  for  perusal,  on  condi- 
tion that  they  be  carefully  handled  and  returned  to 
their  proper  places  by  the  reader  before  leaving  the 
rooms.  . f 

^ 2.  Members  may  take  books  to  their  hoihekat  any 
time  when  the  Library  is  open,  subject  to  the  regula- 
tions hereinafter  stated.  ^ 

3.  No  volumes  shall  be  taken  from. the  rooms  with-'  .= 
out  the  permission  of  the  librarian,  and  without  being 
properly  registered. 

Violation  of  this  section  shall  be  punished  by  suspen- 
sion from  the  use  of  the  Library. 

4.  Not  more  than  one  volume  may  be  taken  at  one 
time  ; and  no  volume  may  be  retained^  for  a longer  per- 
iod than  the  time  specified  upon  the  cover,  or  two  Tyeeks 
if  no  time  be  so  specified.  A book  may  be  renewed  for 
one  w^eek. 

5.  A fine  of  two  cents  shall  be  demanded  for  every 
day  a book  is  retained  beyond  the  specified  time,  and 
no  member  shall  be  allowed  to  take  out  a book  so  long 
as  any  fine  remains  unpaid. 

6.  If  any  volume  be  lost  or  injured,  the  volume,  or 
the  set  to  which  it  belongs,  shall  be  replaced,  or  its 
value  in  money  given  to  the  Librarian  by  the  person  to 
whom  it  is  charged  in  his  record. 

Members  will  confer  a favor  by  informing  us  of  any 
mutilation  or  defacement  of  books  noticed  by  them- 
selves. 


Rooms  open  from  1)  a.  u.,  to  D.  lfL 


Added  to  Uce 


18 


BUN  VAN'S 


PILGRIM’S  PROGRESS, 


JVORDS  OF  ONE  SYLLABLE. 


SAMUEL  PHILLIPS  DAY, 


AUTHOR  OF  *‘THE  RARE  ROMANCE  OF  REYNARD  THE  FOX  ” IN  WORDS  OF  ONE  SYLLABLE. 


WI  T H ILLUSTRATIONS. 


CASSELL,  FETTER,  GALPIN  & CO„ 


NEW  YORK,  LONDON  PARIS. 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2017  with  funding  from 

University  of  Illinois  Urbana-Champaign  Alternates 


https://archive.org/details/bunyanspilgrimsp00days_0 


THE 

PILGRIM’S  PROGRESS. 


CHAPTER  I. 


THE  DEN  AND  THE  DREAM. 


I’S  I went  through  the  wilds  of  this 
world,  I came  to  a place  where  was 
a den,  and  I laid  me  down  in  that 
place  to  sleep  ; and  as  I slept  I dreamt  a dream. 
I dreamt,  and  lo,  I saw  a man  clad  in  rags,  who 
, - stood  in  a spot,  with  his  face  from  his  own 
house,  a book  in  his  hand,  and  a great  load 
on  his  back ! I saw  him  read  in  the  book, 
G and  as  he  read,  he  wept  and  shook  ; and  so  full 
^ was  his  heart,  that  he  broke  out  with  a sad 
cry,  and  said,  “ What  shall  I do  ?” 

In  this  plight,  then,  he  went  home,  and 
^kept  calm  as  long  as  he  could,  that  his  wife 
and  bairns  should  not  see  his  grief ; but  he 
^ could  not  long  hold  his  speech,  for  that  his 


2 


The  Pilgrinis  Progress. 


woe  grew  more  hard  to  bear.  So  at  length 
he  brake  his  mind  to  his  wife  and  bairns  ; 
and  thus  did  he  talk  to  them  : “ Oh,  my  dear 
wife,”  said  he,  “ and  you,  the  bairns  of  my 
heart,  I,  your  dear  friend,  am  quite  lost,  for  a 
load  lies  hard  on  me.  More  than  this,  I am 
told  of  a truth  that  this  our  town  will  be 
burnt  with  fire  from  the  skies,  and  you,  my 
sweet  babes,  shall  come  to  grief,  save  (the 
which  yet  I see  not)  some  way  can  be  found 
to  get  clear  of  harm.”  At  this  his  kin  were 
in  sore  fear ; not  for  that  they  thought  that 
what  he  had  said  to  them  was  true,  but  for  that 
they  had  just  cause  to  dread  some  dire  ill  had 
got  hold  of  his  head.  Hence,  as  night  then 
drew  near,  and  as  they  thought  sleep  might 
soothe  his  brain,  with  all  haste  they  got  him 
to  bed.  But  the  night  was  as  bad  to  him  as 
the  day,  so  that  he  found  no  rest,  but  spent  it 
in  sighs  and  tears.  So,  when  morn  was  come, 
they  would  know  how  he  did  : and  he  told 
them, “Worse  and  worse.”  He  then  set  to,  and 
spoke  to  them  once  more,  but  they  gave  no 
heed  to  his  words,  but  strove  to  drive  off  the 
foul  fumes  of  his  brain  by  sour  looks  and 


The  Den  and  the  Dream. 


3 


harsh  ways.  One  time  they  would  jeer,  then 
would  they  chide,  and  at  last  go  so  far  as 
to  leave  him.  Hence  he  went  to  his  room 
to  pray  for  them,  and  to  ease  his  grief.  He 
would,  too,  take  lone  walks  in  the  fields,  and 
read  and  pray  at  times  : and  thus  for  some 
days  he  spent  his  time. 

Now  I saw  on  a time,  when  he  took 
a stray  walk  in  the  fields,  that  he  was  (as 
he  was  wont)  bent  on  his  book  and  in 
deep  grief  of  mind ; and  as  he  read  he 
burst  out  as  he  had  done  at  first,  “ What 
■shall  I do?” 

I saw,  too,  that  his  eyes  went  this  way 
and  that  way,  as  if  he  would  run  ; yet  he 
stood  still,  for  (as  I took  note)  he  could  not 
tell  which  way  to  go.  I then  saw  a man 
whose  name  was  Evangelist  come  to  him 
and  ask,  “ Why  dost  thou  cry  ?”  Quoth  he, 
“ Sir,  I see  by  the  book  in  my  hand  that  death 
is  my  doom,  and  that  I am  then  to  meet  my 
Judge;  and  I find  that  I do  notwill  to  do 
the  first,  while  I dread  the  last”  Then  said 
Evangelist,  “Why  not  will  to  die,  since  this 
life  is  full  of  ills  ?”  The  man  said,  “The  cause 


4 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


is  I fear  that  this  load  that  is  on  my  back 
will  sink  me  more  low  than  the  grave,  and  I 
shall  go  down  to  hell : and,  sir,  if  I be  not 
fit  to  go  to  gaol,  I am  not  fit  to  hear  my 
doom,  and  bear  the  bane  : and  the  thoughts 
of  these  things  make  me  cry/’ 

Then  said  Evangelist,  “ If  this  be  thy 
state,  why  dost  thou  stand  still  ?”  Said  he, 
“ It  is  for  that  I know  not  where  to  go.” 
Then  he  gave  him  a roll  of  smooth  skin,  on 
which  were  writ  the  plain  words,  “ Flee  from 
the  wrath  to  come.”  The  man  hence  read  it, 
and,  when  he  cast  a keen  look  on  Evangelist, 
said,  “ To  what  place  must  I flee  ?”  Then  said 
Evangelist  (who  did  point  to  a wide  field), 
“Do  you  see  yon  small  gate?”  The  man 
.said,  “ No.”  Then  said  Evangelist,  “ Do 
you  see  yon  bright  light  ?”  He  said,  “ I 
think  I do.”  Then  said  his  guide,  “ Keep 
that  light  in  your  eye,  and  go  up  at  once  to 
it,  so  shalt  thou  see  the  gate  ; at  which,  when 
thou  dost  knock,  it  shall  be  told  thee  what 
thou  shalt  do.” 

So  I saw  in  my  dream  that  the  man  did 
run.  Now  he  had  not  run  far  from  his  own 


The  Den  and  the  Dream. 


5 


door,  but  his  wife  and  bairns  saw  it,  and  in 
a loud  voice  they  strove  to  get  him  to  come 
back  ; but  the  man  put  the  tips  of  his  thumbs 
in  his  ears  and  ran  on,  while  he  did  shout, 
“Life!  life!  life  that  has  no  end  I”  So  he 
did  not  as  much  as  look  back,  but  fled  in  the 
way  of  the  plain. 

His  friends,  in  like  way,  came  out  to  see 
him  run  ; and  as  he  ran  some  did  jeer,  more 
made  threats,  and  some,  in  shrill  tones,  bade 
him  haste  back.  Of  those  who  did  so,  there 
were  two  that  sought  to  fetch  him  back  by 
force.  The  name  of  the  one  was  Obstinate  ; 
and  the  name  of  the  next.  Pliable.  Now  by 
this  time  the  man  was  got  a good  way  off 
from  them  ; but  they  made  up  their  minds  to 
go  in  quest  of  him,  which  they  did  ; and  in  a 
short  time  they  came  up  with  him.  Then  said 
the  man,  “ Friends,  for  what  are  ye  come  ?” 
Quoth  they,  “ To  urge  you  to  go  back  with 
us  T but  he  said,  “ That  can  by  no  means 
be.  You  dwell,”  said  he,  “ in  the  City  of 
Destruction,  the  place,  too,  where  I was 
born  : I see  it  to  be  so  ; and  when,  soon  or 
late,  you  die  there,  you  will  sink  more  deep 


6 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


than  the  grave,  down  to  a place  that  burns 
with  fire,  the  flame  of  which  is  fed  by  a 
strange  stone  that  yields  foul  fumes.  Do 
take  heed,  good  friends,  and  go  forth  with 
me. 

“What!”  said  Obstinate,  “and  leave  our 
friends  and  all  that  brings  us  joy  and  ease?” 

“Yes,”  said  Christian  (for  that  was  his 
name),  “ and  the  cause  is,  that  all  is  of  no 
worth  if  you  weigh  it  with  the  least  of  that 
which  I seek  to  get ; and  if  you  will  go  with 
me,  and  hold  it,  you  shall  fare  as  I do  ; for 
there  where  I go  is  much  and  to  spare  : come 
with  me,  and  prove  my  words.” 

Obs. — “What  are  the  things  you  seek, 
since  you  leave  all  the  world  to  find  them  ?” 

Chr. — “ I seek  a life  that  can  know  no 
taint,  is  pure,  and  that  fades  not ; and  it  is 
laid  up  on  high,  and  safe  there.  Read  it  so, 
if  you  will,  in  my  book.” 

“Tush!”  said  Obstinate,  “I  heed  not 
your  book  : will  you  go  back  with  us  or  no?” 

“ No,  not  I,”  said  Christian,  “ for  I have 
laid  my  hand  to  the  plough.” 

Op.s. — “ Come  then,  friend  Pliable,  let  us 


The  Den  and  the  Dream. 


7 


turn  once  more,  leave  him,  and  go  home. 
There  are  a lot  of  these  fops  with  soft  heads, 
that  when  they  take  a whim  by  the  end,  are 
more  wise  in  their  own  eyes  than  ten  men 
that  can  give  a cause.” 

Then  said  Pliable,  “ Do  not  chide : if 
what  the  good  Christian  says  is  true,  the 
things  he  looks  for  are  of  more  worth  than 
ours.  My  heart  doth  urge  me  to  go  with  my 
friend.” 

Obs. — “ What ! more  fools  still  ? Be  led 
by  me  and  go  back  ; who  knows  to  what 
place  a lout  with  so  sick  a brain  will  lead 
you  ? Go  back,  go  back,  and  be  wise.” 

Chr. — “ Come  with  me,  friend  Pliable  ; 
there  are  such  things  to  be  had  which  I spoke 
of,  and  much  m.ore  bliss  to  boot.  If  you 
heed  not  what  1 say,  read  here  in  this  book ; 
and  for  the  truth  of  what  is  told  in  it,  lo, 
all  is  made  sure  by  the  blood  of  him  that 
made  it.” 

“Well,  friend  Obstinate,”  saith  Pliable, 
“ I fain  would  come  to  a point.  I mean  to 
go  forth  with  this  good  man,  and  to  cast  in 
my  lot  with  him.  But,  my  good  mate,  do 


8 


The  Pilgrim  s Progress. 


you  know  the  way  to  the  place  we  so  long 
for?” 

Chr. — “ I am  told  by  a man,  whose  name 
is  Evangelist,  to  speed  me  to  a small  gate 
that  is  in  front  of  us,  where  we  shall  be  put 
in  the  right  way.” 

Pli. — “ Come  then,  good  friend,  let  us 
go  on.” 

Then  they  went  forth  side  by  side. 

“ And  I will  go  back  to  my  place,”  said 
Obstinate.  “ I will  not  make  one  of  such 
flat  fools.” 


9 


CHAPTER  11. 


THE  SLOUGH  OF  DESPOHD. 

|OW  I saw  in  my  dream  that  when 
Obstinate  was  gone  back,  Christian 
and  Pliable  spoke  as  they  did  walk 
on  the  plain  ; and  this  was  what  they  said  : — 

Chr. — “ Come,  friend  Pliable,  how  do 
you  do  ? I am  glad  you  have  been  led  to 
go  with  me.  Had  but  Obstinate  felt  what  I 
have  felt  of  the  force  and  fear  of  what  is  not 
yet  seen,  he  would  not  in  this  light  way  have 
set  his  back  on  us.” 

Pli.  — “Come,  friend  Christian,  since 
there  are  none  but  us  two  here,  tell  me 
now,  what  more  the  things  are,  and  how  we 
are  to  use  them  where  we  are  bound.” 

Chr. — “ I can  best  grasp  them  with  my 
mind  than  speak  of  them  with  my  tongue : 
but  yet,  since  you  seek  to  know,  I will  read 
of  them  in  my  book.” 

Pli. — “And  do  you  think  that  the  words 
of  your  book  are  true  ?” 


lO 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


Chr. — “Yes,  in  sooth,  for  it  was  made  by 
him  that  could  not  lie.” 

Pli, — “Well  said;  what  things  are 
they  ?” 

Chr. — “ There  is  a realm  in  which  to  live 
that  will  last  for  aye ; where  we  shall  not 
taste  of  death,  that  we  may  dwell  in  it.” 

Pli. — “ Well  said  ; and  what  else  ?” 

Chr. — “ There  are  crowns  of  joy  in  store 
for  us,  and  robes  that  will  make  us  shine  like 
the  sun  at  noon.” 

Pli. — “This  is  right  good;  and  what 
else  ?” 

. Chr. — “There  we  shall  not  weep  or  grieve 
more ; for  he  that  owns  the  place  will  wipe 
all  tears  from  our  eyes.” 

Pli. — “ And  with  whom  shall  we  be 
there  ?” 

Chr. — “ There  we  shall  meet  with  those 
that  will  make  your  eyes  blink  to  gaze  on 
them.  There,  in  like  way,  you  shall  meet 
with  a great  host  that  have  gone  long  since 
to  that  place  ; none  of  them  do  hurt,  but  are 
full  of  love  and  free  from  taint;  each  one 
doth  walk  in  the  sight  of  God,  stands  in  view 


The  Slough  of  Despond. 


1 1 


of  his  face,  and  finds  joy  in  his  grace.  In  a 
word,  there  we  shall  see  those  who  did  rule 
the  Church,  with  their  crowns  of  gold  ; there 
we  shall  see  those  who  trod  in  the  steps  of 
Christ,  with  their  harps  of  gold  ; there  we 
shall  see  men  that  by  the  world  were  cut  in 
bits,  burnt  in  flames,  thrown  to  beasts,  and 
sunk  in  the  seas,  for  the  love  that  they  bare 
to  the  Lord  of  the  place  ; all  well,  and  clad 
with  light  as  with  a robe.” 

Pli. — “ To  hear  this  doth  fill  one’s  heart 
with  Joy.  But  are  these  things  to  form  our 
bliss  ? How  shall  we  get  to  share  in  them  ?” 

Chr. — “ The  Lord,  the  King  of  the  realm, 
hath  set  down  that  in  this  book,  the  pith  of 
which  is,  if  we  in  truth  seek  to  have  it,  he 
will,  of  his  free  grace,  grant  it  to  us.” 

Pli. — “ Well,  my  good  friend,  glad  am  I 
to  hear  of  these  things.  Come  on,  let  us 
mend  our  pace.” 

Chr. — “ I fain  would  go  more  fast,  but 
am  kept  back  by  this  load  on  my  back.” 

Now  I saw  in  my  dream  that  just  as  they 
had  put  an  end  to  this  talk  they  drew  up 
nigh  to  a deep  slough  that  was  in  the  midst 


1 2 The  Pilgrim  s Progress. 

of  the  plain  ; and  as  they  did  not  heed  it, 
both  fell  swap  in  the  bog.  The  name  of  the 
slough  was  ])<^spond.  Here,  then,  did  they 
trudge  for  a time,  so  that  they  were  foul 
from  dirt ; and  Christian,  through  the  load 
that  was  on  his  back,  sank  in  the  mire. 

Then  said  Pliable,  “Ah,  friend  Christian, 
where  are  you  now  ?” 

“ In  sooth,”  said  Christian,  “ I do  not 
know.” 

At  that  Pliable  felt  hurt,  and  said  in  sharp 
tones  to  the  man  who  was  with  him,  “Is  this 
the  bliss  vou  have  told  me  all  this  while  of? 
If  we  have  such  ill  speed  as  we  first  set  out, 
what  may  we  not  look  for  ere  the  time  we  get 
to  the  end  of  our  road  ? May  I once  get  out 
with  my  life,  you  shall  hold  the  brave  land 
for  me.”  And  with  that  he  gave  a bold  stride 
or  two,  and  got  out  of  the  mire  on  that  side 
of  the  slough  which  was  next  his  own  house. 
So  off  he  went,  and  Christian  saw  him  no 
more. 

Hence  Christian  was  left  to  sprawl  in  the 
Slougli  of  Despond,  with  none  to  help  him; 
but  still  he  made  for  that  side  of  the  slough 


The  Slough  of  Despond 


*3 


that  was  most  far  from  his  own  house,  and 
next  to  the  small  gate ; the  which  he  did,  but 
could  not  get  out  from  the  load  he  had  on  his 
back.  But  I saw  in  my  dream  that  a man 
came  to  him,  whose  name  was  Help,  and  did 
ask  him  what  he  did  there. 

“ Sir,”  said  Christian,  “ I was  bade  go 
this  way  by  a man  known  as  Evangelist,  who 
sent  me  in  like  way  to  yon  gate,  that  I might 
scape  the  wrath  to  come.” 

Help. — “ But  why  did  you  not  look  for 
the  steps  ?” 

Chr. — “ Fear  went  with  me  so  hard  that 
I fled  the  next  way,  and  fell  in.” 

Then  said  he,  “ Give  me  thy  hand.” 
So  he  gave  him  his  hand,  and  he  drew  him 
out,  and  set  him  on  sound  ground,  and  let 
him  go  on  his  way. 

Then  I went  to  him  that  did  pluck  him 
out,  and  said,  “ Sir,  whence,  since  through 
this  place  is  the  way  from  the  City  of  Destruc- 
tion to  yon  gate,  is  it  that  this  plat  is  not 
made  whole,  that  those  poor  wights  who  pass 
this  way  may  run  no  risk  ?” 

And  he  said  to  me,  “ This  slough  is  such 


*4 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


a place  that  none  can  mend  it.  It  is  the  valve 
through  which  the  scum  and  filth  that  go 
with  a sense.of  sin  do  run,  and  hence  it  goes 
by  the  name  of  the  Slough  of  Despond  ; for 
still,  as  he  who  sins  is  wrought  up  to  a sense 
of  his  lost  state,  there  spring  forth  in  his  soul 
fears,  and  doubts,  and  dark  thoughts  that 
scare,  which  all  of  them  form  in  a heap  and 
fix  in  this  place  ; and  this  is  the  cause  why 
the  road  is  so  bad.  It  is  not  the  King’s  wish 
that  this  place  should  be  as  it  is.  Those  who 
work  for  him  have,  by  the  wish  of  one  who 
has  chief  charge  of  the  road,  been  long,  long 
years  at  work  on  this  patch  of  ground,  to  see 
if  it  might  be  made  right ; yea,  and  I know,” 
said  he,  “here  have  been  lost  vast  loads  of 
good  and  sage  words,  that  have  at  all  times 
of  the  year  been  brought  from  each  part  of 
the  King’s  realm — and  they  that  can  tell  say 
that  they  are  the  best  stuff  to  make  good 
ground  of  the  place,  if  so  be  it  might  be 
made  sound — but  it  is  the  Slough  of  Despond 
still,  and  so  will  it  be  when  they  have  done 
what  they  can.  True,  there  are,  by  the  help 
of  him  who  frames  the  laws,  some  stout  and 


15 


The  Slough  of  Despond. 

firm  steps  found  through  the  midst  of  this 
slough  ; but  at  such  time  as  this  the  place 
doth  much  spew  out  its  filth,  as  it  does  when 
rain  falls ; these  steps  are  then  all  but  hid,  or 
if  they  be  seen,  men,  through  the  light  state 
of  their  heads,  step  on  one  side,  and  then 
they  get  all  grime  with  mire,  though  the 
steps  be  there  ; but  the  ground  is  good  when 
they  are  once  got  in  at  the  gate.” 

Now  I saw  in  my  dream  that  by  this  time 
Pliable  was  got  home  to  his  house.  So  those 
who  dwelt  near  came  to  see  him  ; and  some 
of  them  said  he  was  a wise  man  for  that  he 
came  back,  and  some  did  call  him  fool  for  the 
' rash  risk  he  took,  and  for  that  he  was  led  to 
go  with  Christian.  Some,  too,  did  flout  at 
his  lack  of  nerve,  and  said,  “ In  sooth,  since 
you  made  the  move,  I would  not  have  been 
so  base  as  to  blench  for  a few  slight  bales.” 
So  Pliable  sat  like  a sneak  in  their  midst. 
But  at  last  he  put  on  airs,  and  then  they  all 
did  change  their  tales,  and  set  on  to  gibe 
poor  Christian,  who  was  not  there.  And  thus 
much  that  bears  on  Pliable. 


i6 


CHAPTER  III. 

WORLDLY-WISEMAN. 

|S  Christian  took  his  lone  walk  he  saw 
one,  while  yet  a good  way  off,  cross 
the  field  to  meet  him,  and  their  hap 
was  to  meet  just  as  they  did  cross  the  same 
way.  The  man’s  name  was  Mr.  Worldly- 
wiseman  ; he  dwelt  in  the  town  of  Carnal- 
policy,  a great  town,  and  hard  by  from  whence 
Christian  came.  This  man  then  fell  in  with 
Christian,  of  whom  he  had  heard  ; for  that 
Christian  had  set  forth  from  the  City  of 
Destruction  was  the  talk  of  the  town,  and 
spread  far  and  wide.  Hence  Master  Worldly- 
wiseman,  as  he  had  some  guess  of  him  by  his 
slow  gait,  his  sighs  and  groans,  and  the  like, 
thus  held  some  talk  with  Christian. 

WoR. — “ How  now,  good  friend  ; where 
dost  thou  go  bent  down  with  such  a weight?” 

CiiR. — “ As  big  a load,  in  sooth,  as  I think 
a poor  wight  had  in  his  life!  And  as  you  ask 
where  I go,  I tell  you,  sir,  I am  bound  for  yon 


Worldly-  Wiseman. 


17 


small  gate  in  front  of  me  : for  there,  as  I am 
told,  I shall  be  put  in  a way  to  be  rid  of  my 
huge  load.” 

WoR. — “ Hast  thou  a wife  and  bairns  ?” 

Chr. — “ Yes  ; but  I am  so  bent  with  this 
pack  on  my  back,  that  I have  not  joy  in  them 
as  of  yore  ; I think  I am  as  if  I had  none.” 

WoR. — “ Wilt  thou  give  heed  to  me,  if  I 
tell  thee  what  course  to  take?” 

Chr. — “ If  what  you  say  be  good,  I will ; 
for  I stand  in  need  of  a wise  guide.” 

WoR. — “ I would  urge  thee,  then,  that 
thou  with  all  speed  get  rid  of  thy  load  ; for 
thou  wilt  not  have  ease  of  mind  till  then  : nor 
canst  thou  take  joy  in  the  gifts  which  God 
has  dealt  to  thee  till  then.” 

Chr. — “ That  is  that  which  I seek  for, 
which  is  to  be  rid  of  this  great  load  : but  get 
it  off  of  my  own  strength  I must  fail  to  do ; 
nor  is  there  a man  in  our  land  that  can  take 
it  off  my  back  ; hence  I go  this  way,  as  I 
told  you,  that  I may  be  rid  of  my  load.” 

WoR. — “ Who  bid  thee  go  this  way  to  be 
rid  of  thy  load  ?” 

Chr. — “ A man  that  I thought  was  high 


The  Pil^nins  Progress. 


i8 


and  great ; his  name,  as  my  mind  serves  me, 
is  Evangelist.” 

WoR. — “ Out  on  him  for  his  pains ! 
There  is  not  a more  rough  way,  or  one  of 
such  risk,  to  be  found  in  the  world  than  is 
that  he  hath  bade  thee  take  : and  that  thou 
shalt  find  if  thou  wilt  be  led  by  him.  Thou 
hast  met  with  some  ill  hap,  I judge,  ere  this  ; 
for  I see  the  dirt  of  the  Slough  of  Despond 
smears  thee ; but  that  slough  is  but  the  first 
of  the  griefs  those  share  that  go  in  that  way. 
Hear  me : I have  seen  more  years  than  thou. 
Thou  art  like  to  meet  with,  on  the  way  which 
thou  dost  go,  great  griefs,  pain,  lack  of  food 
and  clothes,  sword,  fierce  beasts,  gloom,  and, 
in  a word,  death,  and  what  not ! These  things 
are  most  true,  as  some  find  to  their  cost. 
And  why  should  a man  run  such  risks,  and 
make  light  of  his  life,  just  on  the  word  of  a 
strange  guide  ?” 

CiiR. — “ Why,  sir,  this  load  on  my  back 
is  more  dread  to  me  than  all  these  things  of 
which  you  have  told  : nay,  I think  I care  not 
what  things  I meet  with  in  the  way,  if  so  be 
1 can  but  net  case  from  my  pack.” 


Worldly-  Wiseman. 


19 


WoR. — “ How  didst  thou  come  by  thy 
load  at  first  ?” 

Chr. — “ By  means  of  this  book  in  my 
hand.” 

WoR. — “I  thought  so:  and  it  has  been 
with  thee  as  with  more  weak  men,  who,  when 
they  touch  things  too  high  for  them,  do  at 
once  grow  wild  in  their  wits ; which  wild 
wits  make  men  fools  (as  thine,  I see,  have 
done  thee),  and  run  them  on  bold  flights,  in 
search  of  they  know  not  what.” 

Chr. — “ I know  what  I would  get : it  is 
ease  from  my  great  load.” 

WoR. — “ But  why  wilt  thou  seek  for  ease 
this  way,  as  such  dire  ills  go  with  it?  the 
more  so,  hadst  thou  but  borne  with  me,  I 
could  aid  thee  to  get  what  thou  dost  wish, 
free  from  the  risks  that  thou  in  this  way  wilt 
run.  Yea,  and  the  cure  is  at  hand  This  I 
will  add,  that  in  lieu  of  these  risks  thou  shalt 
meet  with  much  good  luck,  friends,  and 
peace.” 

Chr. — “ Pray,  sir,  make  known  this  boon 
to  me.” 

WoR.— >“  Why,  in  yon  town  (the  town  is 


20 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 

known  as  Morality)  there  dwells  a squire 
whose  name  is  Legality,  a most  shrewd  man, 
and  a man  of  good  name,  that  has  skill  to 
help  men  off  with  such  loads  as  thine  from 
their  backs  ; yea,  I know  he  hath  done  a 
great  deal  of  good  this  way:  ay,  and  more, 
too,  he  hath  skill  to  cure  those  who  grow  out 
of  their  wits  with  their  load.  To  him,  as  I 
said,  thou  canst  go  and  get  help  in  a trice. 
His  house  is  not  quite  a mile  from  this  place  ; 
and  if  he  should  not  be  at  home,  he  hath  a 
fair  young  man  to  his  son,  whose  name  is 
Civility,  that  can  do  it  (to  speak  on)  as  well 
as  his  sage  sire.  There,  I say,  thou  canst 
get  ease  from  thy  load  : and  if  thou  dost  not 
care  to  go  back  to  thy  late  home,  as  in  truth  I 
would  not  wish  thee,  thou  canst  send  for  thy 
wife  and  bairns  to  thee  to  this  town,  where 
thou  wilt  not  lack  a house  to  live  in,  as  scores 
of  such  are  to  let,  one  of  which  thou  canst 
have  at  a fair  rate.  Food  is  there,  in  like 
way,  cheap  and  good  ; and  that  which  will 
make  thy  life  more  bright  is  to  be  sure  that 
thou  shalt  dwell  by  just  folk,  bear  a good 
name,  and  live  in  right  style.” 


Worldly-  Wiseman. 


21 


Now  was  Christian  at  a stand  what  to  do ; 
but  soon  he  thought,  “ If  this  be  true  which 
this  squire  hath  said,  my  best  course  is  to 
be  led  by  him  and  with  that  he  thus  spake 
more. 

Chr. — “ Sir,  which  is  the  way  to  this 
good  man’s  house?” 

WoR. — “ Do  you  see  yon  high  hill  ?” 

Chr. — “ Yes,  quite  well.” 

WoR. — “ By  that  hill  you  must  go,  and 
the  first  house  you  come  at  is  his.” 

So  Christian  went  out  of  his  way  to  go  to 
Mr.  Legality’s  house  for  help.  But  lo,  when 
he  was  got  now  hard  by  the  hill,  so  high  did 
it  seem  ; and  more  than  this,  that  side  of  it 
that  was  next  the  path  did  hang  so  much, 
that  Christian  durst  not  move  on,  lest  the 
hill  should  fall  on  his  head ; for  which  cause 
there  he  stood  still,  and  he  wot  not  what  to 
do.  His  load,  too,  felt  of  more  weight  to  him 
than  while  he  was  in  the  way.  But  soon 
there  came  fierce  flames  of  fire  out  of  the  hill, 
each  flash  of  which  made  Christian  dread  he 
should  be  burnt : here,  then,  he  sweat,  and 
did  quake  for  fear.  And  POW  h§  was 


22 


The  Pilgrim  s Progress, 

wroth  for  the  heed  he  gave  to  Mr.  Worldly- 
wisenian’s  words.  And  with  that  he  saw 
Evangelist  come  forth  to  meet  him  ; at  the 
sight  of  whom  he  could  not  but  blush  for 
shame.  So  Evangelist  drew  more  and  more 
near,  and  when  he  came  up  to  him  he  gave 
him  a stern  look,  and  thus  did  he  speak  with 
Christian  : — 

“ What  dost  thou  here  ?”  said  he.  At 
which  words  Christian  knew  not  what  to 
say  ; whence  for  a while  he  stood  dumb 
in  his  sight.  Then  said  Evangelist  to  him, 
“Art  not  thou  the  man  that  I found  in 
tears  back  of  the  wails  of  the  City  of 
Destruction  ?” 

Chr. — “ Yes,  dear  sir,  I am  the  man.” 

Evan. — “ Did  I not  tell  thee  the  way  to 
the  small  gate  ?” 

“ Yes,  dear  sir,”  said  Christian. 

Evan. — “ How  is  it  then  that  thou  art  so 
soon  found  in  this  place  ? for  thou  art  now 
out  of  the  way.’" 

CiiR. — “ I met  with  a squire,  so  soon  as  I 
had  got  clear  of  the  Slough  of  Despond,  who 
made  me  think  that  1 might,  in  the  town 


Worldly-  Wiseman. 


23 


which  did  face  me,  find  a man  that  could  take 
off  my  load." 

Evan. — “ What  was  he  ?’’ 

Chk. — “ He  had  the  airs  of  a squire,  and 
spoke  much  to  me,  and  got  me  at  last  to 
yield  ; so  I came  to  this  place  : but  when  I 
saw  this  hill,  and  how  it  hangs  its  brow,  I at 
once  made  a stand,  lest  it  should  fall  on  my 
head.’’ 

Evan. — “ What  said  that  squire  to  you  ?’’ 

Chr.  — “ Why,  he  fain  would  know  to 
what  place  I was  bound;  and  I told  him.” 

Evan. — “And  what  said  he  then?” 

Chr. — “ He  sought  to  know  if  I had  a 
wife  and  bairns,  and  I told  him  : ‘ but,’  said  I, 
‘ 1 am  so  borne  down  with  the  load  that  is  on 
my  back,  that  I take  not  the  same  joy  in  them 
as  I once  did.’  ” 

Evan. — “And  what  said  he  then?” 

Chr. — “ He  bid  me  with  speed  get  rid  oi 
my  load,  and  I told  him  it  was  ease  that  1 
sought:  and  said  I,  ‘I  am  hence  bound  for 
yon  gate  to  gain  more  news  how  I may  get 
to  the  place  where  my  load  may  be  cast  off.’ 
So  he  said  that  he  would  show  me  the  best 


24 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


way,  one  less  long,  too,  and  not  so  rife  with 
risks  as  the  way,  sir,  that  you  set  me  in  : 

‘ which  way,’  said  he,  ‘ will  take  you  to  a 
squire’s  house  that  hath  skill  to  take  off 
these  loads.  So  I put  faith  in  him,  and  set 
out  of  that  way  till  I came  to  this,  if  so  be  I 
might  soon  get  ease  from  my  load  : but  when 
I came  to  this  place,  and  saw  things  as  they 
are,  I stood  for  fear,  as  I said,  of  harm  : but 
now  I know  not  what  to  do.” 

Then  said  Evangelist,  “ Stand  still  a 
short  time,  that  I may  show  thee  the  words 
of  God.”  So  he  stood  and  shook.  Then 
said  Evangelist,  “ See  that  ye  spurn  not  him 
that  speaks.  Eor  if  they  did  not  scape  who 
did  spurn  him  that  spake  on  earth,  much  more 
shall  not  we  scape  if  we  turn  off  from  him 

i. 

that  speaks  from  on  high.”  He  said  m like 
way,  “ Now  the  just  shall  live  by  faith  ; but 
if  any  man  draw  back  my  soul  shall  have  no 
joy  in  him.”  And  in  this  mode  did  he  turn 
these  words  to  good  : “ Thou  art  the  man 
that  doth  run  right  in  this  woe.  Thou 
hast  sought  to  spurn  the  voice  of  the 
Most  High,  and  to  draw  back  thy  foot  from 


Worldly-  Wiseman. 


25 


the  way  of  peace.  So,  in  fine,  as  to  risk  th)’ 
soul.” 

Then  Christian  fell  down  at  his  feet  as 
dead,  and  did  cry,  “ Woe  is  me,  for  I am 
lost!”  At  the  sight  of  which  Evangelist 
caught  him  by  the  right  hand,  and  said,  “ Be 
not  frail,  but  have  faith.”  Then  did  Christian 
show  some  signs  of  life,  and  stood  up,  while 
he  shook,  as  at  first,  in  sight  of  Evangelist. 

Then  Evangelist  went  on,  and  said, 
“ Give  much  wiore  heed  to  the  things  that  I 
shall  tell  thee  of.  I will  now  show  thee  who 
it  was  did  lure  thee  ; and,  in  like  way,  who  it 
was  to  whom  he  sent  thee.  The  man  that 
met  thee  is  one  Worldly-wiseman,  and  he 
bears  a fit  name ; in  part,  for  that  his  creed  is 
what  the  world  holds  (whence  he  goes,  at  all 
times,  to  the  town  of  Morality  to  church) ; 
and  in  part,  for  that  he  loves  such  faith  best, 
for  it  saves  him  from  the  cross  ; and  more, 
for  that  he  is  of  this  gross  mind,  he  hence 
seeks  to  speak  ill  of  my  ways,  though  right. 
Now,  there  are  three  things  in  this  man’s 
words  that  thou  must  be  sure  and  shun — his 
scheme  to  turn  thee  out  of  the  way;  his 


26 


TJie  Pilgrims  Progress. 


wish  to  make  the  cross  a shame  to  thee ; and 
his  guile,  which  did  tempt  thee  to  set  thy  feet 
in  that  way  that  leads  to  death. 

“ First,  thou  must  loathe  for  that  he  made 
thee  turn  out  of  the  way  ; yea,  and  of  thy 
own  free  will  too  ; for  this  is  to  spurn  the  call 
of  God  just  for  to  please  a Worldly-wiscman. 
The  Lord  says,  ‘ Strive  to  come  in  at  the 
strait  gate  (the  gate  to  which  I sent  thee)  ; 
for  strait  is  the  gate  that  doth  lead  to  life, 
and  few  there  be  that  find  it.’  From  this 
small  gate,  and  from  the  way  to  it,  hath  this 
vile  man  made  thee  stray,  so  as  to  have  nigh-; 
brought  dire  bale  on  thee  ; hate,  then,  that* 
he  should  have  made  thee  turn  out  of  the 
way  ; and  feel  low  in  mind  for  that  thou  didst 
give  heed  to  him. 

“ More  than  this,  thou  must  loathe  for 
that  he  strove  to  make  the  cross  a shame  to 
thee  ; for  thou  art  to  prize  it  more  than  the 
whole  wealth  of  the  world ; for,  mark,  the 
Most  High  hath  told  thee,  ‘ He  that  will 
save  his  life  shall  lose  it  and  ‘ He  that 
comes  after  him,  and  hates  not  his  sire  and 
dame,  and  wife  and  bairns,  and  kith  and  kin, 


Worldly-  Wiseman. 


27 


yea,  and  his  own  life  too,  can  be  none  of 
his  ?’  I say,  then,  for  a man  to  strive  to  make 
thee  think  that  that  shall  be  thy  death,  void 
of  which  the  Truth  hath  said  thou  canst  not 
have  life  that  knows  no  end,  this  creed  thou 
must  spurn. 

“ Once  more,  thou  must  hate,  for  that  he 
made  thee  set  thy  feet  in  the  way  that  leads 
to  death.  And  for  this  thou  must  bear  in 
mind  to  whom  he  sent  thee,  no  less  than  his 
lack  of  skill  to  rid  thee  of  thy  load.  He  to 
whom  thou  wast  sent  for  ease,  by  name 
H^egality,  is  the  son  of  the  slave,  ‘ which  now 
is,  and  is  in  thrall  with  her  bairns,’  and 
is,  to  use  a trope,  this  Mount  Sinai  which 
thou  didst  fear  would  fall  on  thy  head.  Now 
if  she,  with  her  brood,  are  in  bonds,  how 
canst  thou  hope  by  them  to  be  made  free  ? 
Hence  this  Legality  has  not  the  gift  to  set 
thee  free  from  thy  load.  No  man,  as  yet,  got 
rid  of  his  load  by  him  : no,  nor  till  the  end  of 
time  is  like  to  be.  ‘ By  the  works  of  the  law 
none  can  be  made  just, ’for  by  the  deeds  of  the 
law  no  man  that  lives  can  be  rid  of  his  load  ; 
hence  Mr.  Worldly-wiseman  is  a loon,  and 


28 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


Mr.  Legality  a cheat ; and  as  for  his  son, 
Civility,  though  he  wears  soft  looks,  he  is  but 
a knave,  and  must  fail  to  help  thee.  Trust 
me,  there  is  naught  else  in  all  this  noise  that 
thou  hast  heard  of  this  sot  but  a scheme 
to  lure  thee  of  thy  soul’s  bliss.  For  which 
cause  he  made  thee  turn  from  the  way  which 
I had  set  thee.” 

Then  Evangelist  in  a loud  voice  bade  the 
skies  hear  and  set  their  seal  on  what  he  said, 
and  with  that  there  came  words  and  fire  out 
of  the  mount,  at  the  base  of  which  poor  Chris- 
tian stood,  that  made  the  hair  of  his  flesh 
stand  up.  The  words  were  in  this  strain  : 
“ Such  as  are  of  the  works  of  the  law  have  the 
ban  of  the  curse  : for  it  is  writ,  A curse  on 
each  one  that  bides  not  in  all  things  which 
are  writ  in  the  book  of  the  law  to  do  them.” 

Now  Christian  felt  sure  fear  of  death, 
and  burst  out  in  a shrill  cry,  full  of  woe, 
as  he  did  curse  the  time  in  which  he  met 
with  Mr.  Woiidly-wiseman.  Still  did  he 
say  he  was  the  chief  of  fools  for  the  heed  he 
gave  to  him.  More  than  this,  he  felt  deep 
shame  to  tliink  that  this  squire’s  speech. 


Worldly-  Wiseman. 


29 


which  sprung  but  from  the  flesh,  should  have 
had  such  weight  with  him  as  to  cause  him  to 
quit  the  right  way.  This  done,  he  spoke  to 
Evangelist  in  words  and  sense  thus  : 

Chr. — “ Sir,  what  think  you  ? Is  there 
hope  ? May  I now  go  back  and  go  up  to  the 
small  gate?  Shall  I not  be  left  lorn  for  this, 
and  sent  back  from  thence  in  shame  ? I 
grieve  that  I paid  heed  to  this  man’s  words, 
but  may  my  sin  meet  with  grace?” 

Then  said  Evangelist  to  him,  “ Thy  sin 
is  most  great,  for  by  it  thou  hast  done  two 
bad  deeds  : thou  hast  left  the  way  that  is 
good  to  tread  in  wrong  paths,  yet  will  the 
man  at  the  gate  let  thee  pass,  for  he  has  good- 
will for  men  ; but,  ” said  he,  “ take  heed  that 
thou  turn  on  one  side  no  more.” 

Then  did  Christian  make  up  his  mind  to 
go  back,  and  Evangelist,  when  he  did  kiss 
his  cheek,  gave  him  a smile,  and  bid  him 
God  speed. 


3C 


CHAPTER  IV.. 

THE  WICKET-GATE. 

m 

O Christian  went  on  with  haste,  nor 
spake  he  to  a man  by  the  way  ; nor 
if  a man  spoke  to  him,  would  he 
deign  him  a word.  He  went  like  one  that  all 
the  while  trod  on  ground  he  should  not  touch, 
and  could  by  no  means  think  he  was  safe,  till 
once  more  he  got  in  the  way  which  he  left 
to  please  Mr.  Worldly-wiseman  : so  in  course 
of  time  Christian  got  up  to  the  gate.  Now 
at  the  top  of  the  gate  there  were  writ  these 
words  : 

atib  it  sljall  ope  to  50U/' 

Hence  he  did  knock  more  than  once  or  twice, 
and  said — 

May  I now  come  in  here  ? and  will  but  he 
Who  has  the  might,  ope  it  to  such  as  me 
Though  erst  a foe  I’ve  been?  Oh,  then  shall  I 
Not  fail  to  sing  for  aye  his  praise  on  high/' 

At  last  there  came  a grave  man  to  the 
gate,  who.se  name  was  Goodwill,  who  sought 


The  Wicket-gate.  3 1 

to  know  who  was  there  ? and  whence  he 
came  ? and  what  he  would  have  ? 

Chr. — “ Here  is  a poor  vile  wight ; I come 
from  the  City  of  Destruction,  but  am  bound 
for  Mount  Zion,  that  I may  get  safe  from  the 
wrath  to  come.  I would,  for  this  cause,  sir, 
since  I am  told  that  by  this  gate  is  the  way 
to  it,  know  if  you  will  let  me  in.” 

“ I will,  with  all  my  heart,”  said  he ; and 
with  that  he  drew  back  the  gate. 

So  when  Christian  made  the  first  move, 
the  man  gave  him  a pull.  Then  said 
Christian,  “ What  means  that  ?”  The  man 
told  him,  “ A short  way  from  this  gate  there 
is  built  a strong  fort,  of  which  the  Prince 
of  Hell  is  the  chief ; from  thence  both  he  and 
they  that  are  with  him  shoot  darts  at  them 
that  come  up  to  this  gate,  that  so  be  they  may 
die  ere  they  get  in.”  Then  said  Christian, 
“ I feel  joy  and  yet  shake.”  So  when  he  was 
got  in,  the  man  of  the  gate  said  to  him, 
“ Who  told  him  to  come  to  that  place  ?” 

Chr. — “ Evangelist  bid  me  come  here 
and  knock,  as  I did ; and  he  said  that  you, 
sir,  would  tell  me  what  I must  do.” 


32 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


Good. — “A  door  is  set  wide  for  thee, 
and  no  man  can  shut  it.” 

Chr. — “ Now  I reap  in  part  the  good  of 
mv  risks.” 

Good. — “ But  how  is  that  no  one  came 
with  you  ?” 

Chr. — “ For  that  none  of  those  who 
dwelt  near  me  saw  their  plight  as  I saw 
mine.” 

Good. — “ Did  one  or  more  of  them  know 
that  you  meant  to  come  here  ?” 

Cur. — “ Yes  ; my  wife  and  bairns  saw  me 
at  the  first,  and  did  call  to  me  to  turn  round. 
In  like  way  some  folk  stood  and  wept,  and 
sought  to  bring  me  back ; but  I stopt  my 
ears,  and  so  came  on  my  way.” 

“ Good. — But  did  none  of  them  go  in 
(|uest  of  you,  to  urge  you  to  go  back?” 

Chr. — “ Yes,  both  Obstinate  and  Pliable ; 
but  when  they  saw  that  they  could  not  gain 
their  end.  Obstinate  went  back,  and  did  rail 
the  while ; but  Pliable  came  with  me  a short 
way.” 

Good. — “ But  why  did  he  not  come 
through  ?” 


The  Wicket-gate. 


33 


Chr. — “We,  in  truth,  came  on  side  by 
side  till  we  came  to  the  Slough  of  Despond, 
in  the  which  he,  in  like  way,  fell  souse  ; and 
then  Pliable  felt  fear,  and  would  not  move 
one  step  more  But  as  he  got  out  on 
that  side  next  to  his  own  house,  he  told 
me  I should  hold  the  brave  land  for  him. 
So  he  went  his  way,  and  I came  mine  : 
he  in  the  wake  of  Obstinate,  and  I to  this 
gate.” 

Then  said  Goodwill,  “ Ah,  poor  man  ! 
Is  the  bliss  of  the  skies  so  light  a thing  with 
him,  that  he  counts  it  not  worth  the  risks  he 
must  run  of  a few  straits,  to  gain  it?” 

“ In  sooth,”  said  Christian,  “ I have  said 
the  truth  of  Pliable;  and  if  I should,  in  like 
case,  say  the  truth  of  my  own  heart,  it  will 
seem  that  I am  as  bad  as  he.  It  is  true  he 
went  back  to  his  house  ; but  I,  too,  did  turn 
on  one  side  to  go  in  the  way  of  death,  and 
I was  led  to  this  by  the  base  arts  of  one 
Mr.  Worldly-wiseman.” 

Good. — “ Oh,  did  he  light  on  you  ? 
What ! he  would  have  had  you  seek  for 
ease  at  the  hands  of  Mr.  Legality  : they  are 


34  Tfie  Pilgrims  Progress. 

both  of  them  true  cheats.  But  were  you  led 
by  him  ?” 

Chr. — “ Yes,  as  far  as  I durst.  I went 
to  find  out  Mr.  Legality,  till  I thought  the 
mount  that  stands  by  his  house  would  have 
come  down  on  my  head ; for  which  cause  I 
had  to  stop.” 

Good. — “ That  mount  has  been  the  death 
of  a host,  and  will  be  the  death  of  still  more  : 
it  is  well  you  came  off  so  well,  and  that  it  did 
not  dash  you  to  bits.” 

Chr. — “ Why,  in  truth,  I do  not  know 
what  hap  had  come  to  me  there,  had  not 
Evangelist  by  good  luck  met  me  once  more, 
while  I did  muse  in  the  midst  of  my  dumps : 
but  it  was  God’s  grace  that  he  came  to  me 
twice,  for  else  I could  not  have  got  to  this 
place.  But  now  I am  come,  such  a one  as  I 
am,  more  fit,  in  sooth,  for  death  by  that  mount, 
than  thus  to  stand  and  talk  with  my  Lord. 
But  oh  ! what  a boon  is  this  to  me,  that  yet 
I am  let  go  in  here  !” 

Good. — “ We  shut  out  none,  and  take  no 
note  of  what  they  have  done  up  to  the  time 
they  come  here : ‘ they  in  no  wise  are  cast 


The  Wicket-gate. 


35 


out:’  and  hence,  good  Christian,  come  a wee 
way  with  me,  and  I will  teach  thee  in  what 
way  thou  must  go.  Look  right  in  front  of 
thee  ; dost  thou  see  this  strait  way  ? That  is 
the  way  thou  must  go.  It  was  cast  up  by 
good  men  and  seers  of  old,  Christ,  and  tho.se 
whom  he  sent  to  preach  his  Word,  and  it  is 
as  straight  as  a rule  can  make  it.  This  is 
the  way  thou  must  go.” 

“ But,”  said  Christian,  “ are  there  no  turns 
or  bends  by  which  one  who  has  not  trod  it 
may  lose  his  way  ?’^ 

Good. — “Yes,  there  are  some  ways  butt 
down  on  this ; and  they  are  bent  and  wide : 
but  thus  thou  canst  judge  the  right  from  the 
wrong,  that  the  first  is  straight  and  not 
broad.” 

Then  I saw  m my  dream  that  Christian 
did  ask  him  if  he  could  not  help  him  off  with 
his  load  that  was  on  his  back ; for  as  yet  he 
had  not  got  rid  of  it,  nor  could  he,  strive  as 
he  might,  get  it  off  save  he  had  help.  He 
told  him,  “As  to  thy  load,  try  and  bear  it  till 
thou  dost  come  to  the  place  of  ease  ; for  there 
it  will,  by  its  own  means,  fall  from  thy  back.” 

D 3 


36  The  Pilgrims  Progress. 

Then  Christian  strove  to  gird  up  his  loins, 
and  to  set  out  on  his  way.  So  he  with  whom 
he  had  held  speech  told  him,  “That  by  that 
he  had  gone  some  way  from  the  gate  he 
would  come  at  the  house  of  the  Interpreter, 
at  whose  door  he  should  knock,  and  he  would 
show  him  good  things.”  Then  Christian 
took  his  leave  of  his  friend,  and  he  once 
more  bid  him  God  speed. 


37 


CHAPTER  V. 

THE  interpreter’s  HOUSE. 

HEN  he  went  on  till  he  came  to  the 
house  of  the  Interpreter,  at  which 
he  gave  some  smart  knocks.  At 
last  one  came  to  the  door,  and  did  ask  who 
was  there  ? 

Chr. — “Sir,  here  is  a wight  on  the  road, 
who  was  bid  by  one  that  knows  the  good 
man  of  the  house  to  call  here  for  my  weal ; 
I would  hence  speak  with  the  chief  of  the 
house.”  So  he  did  call  for  the  head  of  the 
house,  who  in  a short  time  came  to  Chris- 
tian, and  sought  to  know  what  he  would 
have. 

“ Sir,”  said  Christian,  “ I am  a man  that 
am  come  from  the  City  of  Destruction,  and 
am  bound  for  the  Mount  Zion ; and  I was 
told  by  the  man  that  stands  at  the  gate  at  the 
head  of  this  way,  that  if  I came  here  you 
would  show  me  good  things,  such  as  would 
be  a help  to  me  on  the  road.” 


38  The  Pilgrims  Progress. 

Then  said  the  Interpreter,  “ Come  in ; I 
will  show  thee  that  which  will  be  of  use  to 
thee.”  So  he  told  his  man  to  light  the  lamp, 
and  bid  Christian  go  in  his  track.  Then  he 
had  him  in  a room  where  none  else  could 
come,  and  bid  his  man  fold  back  the  door,  the 
which  when  he  had  done  Christian  saw  the 
print  of  one,  most  grave  of  look,  hung  up  on 
the  wall,  and  this  was  the  style  of  it ; It  had 
eyes  that  did  stare  at  the  sky,  the  best  of 
books  in  its  hand,  and  the  law  of  truth  was 
wTit  on  its  lips,  the  world  was  at  its  back,  it 
stood  as  if  it  did  plead  with  men,  and  a 
crown  of  gold  did  hang  nigh  its  head. 

Then  said  Christian,  "What  means  this?” 

Inter. — "The  man  whose  print  this 
is,  is  one  of  a host ; he  can  breed  bairns 
and  nurse  them  when  they  are  born.  And 
now  that  thou  dost  see  him  with  his  eyes  lift 
up  to  the  skies,  the  best  of  books  in  his  hand, 
and  the  law  of  truth  writ  on  his  lips,  it  is 
to  show  thee  that  his  work  is  to  know  and 
make  known  dark  things  to  such  as  sin,  just 
as  now  thou  dost  see  him  stand  as  if  he 
would  plead  with  men.  And  as  thou  dost  sec 


The  Interpreter  s House. 


39 


the  world  cast  at  his  back,  and  that  a crown 
hangs  nigh  his  head,  it  is  to  show. thee  that 
to  slight  and  spurn  the  things  of  time  for 
the  love  that  he  hath  for  Him  he  serves, 
he  is  sure  in  the  world  that  comes  next  to 
have  his  due  meed.  Now,”  said  the  Inter- 
preter, “ I have  shown  thee  this  print  first  for 
this  cause,  that  the  man  whose  print  this  is, 
is  the  sole  man  whom  the  Lord  of  the  place 
where  thou  dost  go  hath  sent  as  thy  guide 
through  all  the  twists  and  turns  thou  wilt 
meet  with  in  the  way  ; hence  take  good  heed 
to  what  I have  shown  thee,  and  bear  well  in 
thy  mind  what  thou  hast  seen,  lest,  in  thy 
route,  thou  meet  with  some  that  say  they  can 
lead  thee  right;  but  their  way  goes  down  to 
death.” 

Then  he  took  him  by  the  hand,  and  led 
him  to  a large  room  on  the  ground  floor  that 
was  full  of  dust,  as  it  had  not  been  swept 
since  the  house  was  built ; the  which,  when 
he  had  seen  it  a short  while,  the  Interpreter 
did  call  for  a man  to  sweep.  Now  when 
he  swept  the  dust  fled  round  so  thick  that 
it  did  well  nigh  choke  Christian.  Then 


40 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


said  the  Interpreter  to  a girl  that  stood  by, 
“ Bring  hence  from  yon  brook  the  means  to 
lay  this  dust which  when  she  had  done,  it 
was  swept  and  made  clean  with  ease. 

Then  said  Christian,  “What  means  this?” 

The  Interpreter  thus  spoke  : “ This  room 
on  the  ground  floor  is  the  heart  of  man  that 
has  not  been  made  pure  by  the  sweet  grace 
of  Christ’s  Word.  The  dust  is  the  sin  that 
cleaves  to  him  through  the  Fall,  and  the  lust 
that  hath  made  foul  the  whole  man.  He 
who  at  first  swept  is  the  Law ; but  she  that 
brought  the  means  to  lay  the  dust  is  the 
Gospel.  Now,  thou  didst  note  that  as  soon 
as  the  first  sought  to  sweep,  the  dust  did  fly 
to  and  fro  so  thick  that  the  room  could  not 
be  made  clean,  but  that  it  did  well  nigh 
choke  thee.  This  is  to  show  thee  that  the 
Law  does  not  cleanse  the  heart  (as  it  works) 
from  sin,  but  in  lieu  of  this,  doth  give  fresh 
life  and  force  to  it,  doth  spread  it  in  the  soul, 
as  it  doth  but  make  known  and  chide,  but 
doth  not  give  strength  to  crush  it.  Once 
more,  as  thou  didst  see  the  girl  lay  the  dust 
of  the  room  with  ease,  so  is  sin  brought  low 


The  Interpreter  s House. 


41 


and  the  soul  made  clean,  through  the  faith  of 
it ; and  hence,  fit  for  the  King  of  Kings  to 
dwell  in.” 

I saw  too,  in  my  dream,  that  the  Inter- 
preter took  him  by  the  hand,  and  had  him  in 
a small  room,  where  sat  two  youths,  each  one 
in  his  chair.  The  name  of  the  most  grown 
was  Passion,  and  of  the  next.  Patience : 
Passion  did  not  seem  at  rest,  but  Patience 
was  quite  still. 

Then  Christian  said,  “ What  is  the  cause 
why  Passion  is  so  ill  at  ease  ?” 

Quoth  the  Interpreter : “ He  who  has 
charge  of  him  would  have  him  stay  for  his 
best  things  till  the  new  year  came  round,  but 
he  will  have  them  all  now  ; but  Patience  has 
the  mind  to  wait.” 

Then  I saw  that  one  came  to  Passion  and 
brought  him  a bag  of  rich  gifts,  and  did  pour 
it  down  at  his  feet ; the  which  he  took  up  and 
felt  joy  in  it,  while  at  Patience  he  gave  a 
laugh  of  scorn.  But  I saw  but  a time,  and 
he  had  got  rid  of  all,  and  had  naught  left 
but  rags. 

Then  said  Christian  to  the  Interpreter, 


42 


The  PilgrinHs  Progress. 


“ I would  have  you  make  this  thing  more 
clear  to  me.” 

So  he  said,  “ These  two  lads  are  signs  : 
Passion  of  the  men  of  this  world,  and 
Patience  of  the  men  of  that  which  is  to  come ; 
for,  as  here  thou  dost  see.  Passion  will  have 
all  now,  this  year,  that  is  to  say  in  this  world, 
so  are  the  men  of  this  world  ; they  must  have 
all  their  good  things  now;  they  durst  not  stay 
till  next  year,  that  is  till  the  next  world,  for 
their  share  of  good.  That  trite  phrase,  ‘ A 
bird  in  the  hand  is  worth  two  in  the  bush,’  is 
of  more  weight  with  them  than  are  all  that 
God’s  Word  doth  speak  of  the  good  of  the 
world  to  come.  But  as  thou  didst  see  that  he 
had  soon  got  rid  of  all,  and  had  left  him 
naught  but  rags,  so  will  it  be  with  all  such 
men  at  the  end  of  this  world.” 

Then  said  Christian,  “ Now  I see  that 
Patience  has  the  best  sense,  and  that  on  more 
grounds  than  one  ; for  that  he  stays  for  the 
best  things,  and  in  like  way  for  that  he  will 
have  the  gain  of  his  when  Passion  has 
naught  but  rags.” 

Ini  ER. — “ Nay,  you  may  add  one  more, 


The  Interpreter  s House. 


43 


to  wit,  the  joys  of  the  next  world  will  not 
wear  out,  but  these  are  soon  gone.  Hence 
Passion  had  not  so  much  cause  to  laugh  at 
Patience,  for  he  had  his  good  things  first,  as 
Patience  will  have  to  laugh  at  Passion,  as 
he  had  his  best  things  last ; for  first  must 
give  place  to  last,  as  last  must  have  his  time 
to  come ; but  last  gives  place  to  naught,  for 
there  is  not  one  to  come.  He,  then,  that  hath 
his  part  first  must  needs  have  a time  to  spend 
it ; but  he  that  hath  his  part  last  must  have 
it  for  aye.  For  this  cause  it  is  said  of  Dives, 
‘ In  the  time  of  thy  life  thou  didst  get  thy 
good  things,  and  Lazarus  bad  things ; but 
now  he  is  in  bliss,  and  thou  art  in  pain.’” 

Chr. — “ Then  I see  it  is  not  best  to  crave 
things  that  are  now,  but  to  wait  for  things  to 
come.” 

Inter. — You  say  truth,  ‘ for  the  things 
that  are  seen  do  not  last,  but  the  things  that 
are  not  seen  fade  not.’  But  though  this  be 
so,  yet  since  things  of  time  and  the  lusts  of 
our  flesh  dwell  so  near,  and  for  that  things  to 
come  and  gross  sense  are  strange  each  to 
each  :*  hence  it  is  that  the  first  of  these  so  soon 


44 


The  Pilgrims  Progress 

fall  to  love,  and  that  so  wide  a gulf  is  kept  up 
in  the  next  case.” 

Then  I saw  in  my  dream  that  the  Inter- 
preter took  Christian  by  the  hand,  and  led 
him  to  a place  where  a fire  burnt  close  to 
a wall,  and  one  stood  by  it,  who  strove  at  all 
times  to  quench  it ; but  the  more  wet  cast  on 
it,  the  more  high  and  hot  it  burnt. 

Then  said  Christian,  “ What  means  this  ?” 

The  Interpreter  said,  “ This  fire  is  the 
work  of  grace  that  is  wrought  in  the  heart ; 
he  that  casts  wet  on  it  to  quench  it  and  put  it 
out,  is  the  Foe  of  Man:  but  in  that  thou  dost 
see  the  fire  in  spite  of  this  burn  more  high 
and  hot,  thou  shalt  as  well  see  the  cause  of 
that.”  So  he  had  him  round  to  the  back 
side  of  the  wall,  where  he  saw  a man  with  a 
large  flask  of  oil  in  his  hand,  of  the  which  he 
did  not  cease  to  cast  in  the  fire,  though  none 
knew  of  it. 

Then  said  Christian,  “ What  means  this  ?” 

Quoth  the  Interpreter,  “ This  is  Christ, 
who  at  all  times  with  the  oil  of  his  grace 
keeps  up  the  work  first  wrought  in  the  heart, 
by  the  means  of  which,  in  spite  of  what  the 


The  Interpreter  s House. 


45 


foe  can  do,  the  souls  of  his  flock  prove  full  of 
grace  still.  And  in  that  thou  didst  see  that 
the  man  stood  at  the  back  of  the  wall  to  make 
the  fire  rage  ; this  is  to  teach  thee  that  it  is 
hard  for  those  whom  the  foul  fiend  tempts  to 
see  how  this  work  of  grace  is  kept  up  in  the 
soul.” 

I saw,  in  like  way,  that  the  Interpreter 
took  him  once  more  by  the  hand,  and  led 
him  to  a choice  place,  where  was  built  a 
great  house,  fine  to  look  at ; at  the  sight  of 
which  Christian  felt  much  joy ; he  saw,  too, 
on  the  top  of  it  some  folk  that  did  walk  to 
and  fro,  who  were  clad  all  in  gold. 

Then  said  Christian,  “ May  we  go  in 
there  ?” 

Then  the  Interpreter  took  him,  and  led 
him  up  nigh  to  the  door  of  the  great  house ; 
and  lo,  at  the  door  stood  a host  of  men  as 
did  wish  to  go  in,  but  durst  not.  There,  too, 
sat  a man  a short  way  from  the  door,  at  the 
side  of  a board,  with  a book  and  his  desk  in 
front  of  him,  to  take  the  name  of  him  that 
should  come  in.  More  than  this,  he  saw 
that  in  the  porch  stood  groups  of  men,  clad 


46 


The  Pilgi'vns  Progress. 


in  coats  of  mail,  to  keep  it,  who  meant  to  do 
all  the  hurt  and  harm  they  could  to  the  man 
that  would  go  in.  Now  was  Christian  in  a 
sore  maze.  At  last,  when  all  the  men  did 
start  back  for  fear  of  the  men  who  bore  arms, 
Christian  saw  a man  of  a bold  face  come  up 
to  the  man  that  sat  there  to  write,  and  say, 
“ Set  down  my  name,  sir;”  the  which  when 
he  had  done,  he  saw  the  man  draw  his  sword, 
and  put  a casque  on  his  head,  and  rush  to  the 
door  on  the  men  who  had  arms,  who  laid  on 
him  with  fierce  force ; but  the  man,  not  at  all 
put  out  of  the  way,  fell  to,  and  did  cut  and 
hack  with  all  his  might : so,  when  he  had  got 
and  dealt  scores  of  wounds  to  those  that  strove 
to  keep  him  out,  he  cut  his  way  through  them 
all,  and  made  straight  for  the  great  house  ; at 
which  there  was  a sweet  voice  heard  from 
those  that  were  in  it,  and  of  those  that  did 
walk  on  the  top  of  the  house,  in  this  wise — 

Come  in,  come  in, 

Bliss  for  all  time  thou  shalt  win.*^ 


So  he  went  in,  and  was  clad  with  such  robes 
as  they.  Then  did  Christian  smile,  and 


The  Interpreter  s House. 


47 


say,  “ I think  of  a truth  I know  what  this 
means.” 

“ Now,”  said  Christian,  “ let  me  go  hence.” 

" Nay,  stay,”  said  the  Interpreter,  “ till  I 
have  shown  thee  some  more ; and  then  thou 
shalt  go  on  thy  way.” 

So  he  took  him  by  the  hand  once  more, 
and  led  him  to  a room  dark  as  pitch,  where 
there  sat  a man  in  a steel  cage.  Now  the 
man  to  look  on  was  most  sad  ; he  sat  with 
his  eyes  bent  on  the  ground,  his  hands 
claspt,  and  he  gave  sighs  as  if  he  would 
break  his  heart. 

Then  said  Christian,  “ What  means  this  ?” 

At  which  the  Interpreter  bid  him  talk 
with  the  man. 

Then  said  Christian  to  the  man,  “What 
art  thou  ?” 

The  man  said,  “ I am  what  I was  not 
once.” 

Chr. — “What  wast  thou  once?” 

The  man  said,  “ I once  did  seem  to  be 
what  I was  not ; fair  in  mine  own  eyes,  and 
in  the  eyes  of  those  that  knew  me.  I was 
once,  as  I thought,  fair  for  the  Celestial  City, 


48 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


and  went  so  far  as  to  have  joy  at  the  thoughts 
that  I should  get  there.” 

Chr. — “Well,  but  what  art  thou  now?” 

Man. — “I  am  now  a man  lost  to  hope  ; in 
which  gloom  I am  shut  up  as  in  this  steel 
cage.  I fail  to  get  out : Oh,  now  I fail !” 

Chr. — “ But  how  didst  thou  get  in  this 
state  ?” 

Man. — “ I left  off  to  watch  and  be  of 
sound  mind.  I laid  the  reins  on  the  neck 
of  my  lusts ; I did  sin  in  face  of  the 
light  of  the  Word,  and  the  grace  of  God. 
I made  the  Spirit  grieve,  and  he  is  gone; 
I did  tempt  the  fiend,  and  he  is  come  to 
me ; I have  made  God  wroth,  and  he  has 
left  me ; I have  let  my  heart  grow  so  hard, 
that  I fail  to  weep  for  my  sins.” 

Then  said  Christian  to  the  Interpreter, 
“ But  is  there  no  hope  for  such  a man  as 
this?” 

“ Ask  him,”  said  the  Interpreter. 

Then  said  Christian,  “ Is  there  no  hope, 
but  you  must  be  kept  in  the  steel  cage  of 
gloom  ?” 

Man. — “ None  at  all.” 


The  Interpreter  s House. 


49 


Chr. — “ Why  ? The  Son  of  the  Most 
High  is  full  of  ruth.” 

Man. — “ I have  put  him  to  death  once 
more,  I have  set  at  naught  his  gifts,  thought 
his  blood  a thing  of  no  use,  did  spurn  the 
Spirit  of  grace,  hence  I am  shut  out  of  all 
that  God’s  Word  tells  of,  and  I am  quite 
lost.” 

Chr. — “ For  what  did  you  get  in  such 
a sad  state  ?” 

Man. — “ For  the  lusts,  needs,  and  gains 
of  this  world ; in  the  whirl  of  which  I 
thought  I should  have  much  joy ; but  now 
each  one  of  those  things  bites  me,  and  gnaws 
me  like  a worm  of  fire.” 

Chr. — “ But  canst  thou  not  now  grieve 
and  turn  ?” 

Man. — “ God  hath  not  let  me  ; his  Word 
gives  me  no  aid  to  faith  ; yea,  he  hath  shut 
me  up  in  this  steel  cage  ; nor  can  all  the  men 
in  the  world  let  me  out.  A time  that  ends 
not ! how  shall  I fight  with  the  woe  that  I 
must  meet  with  when  what  we  call  time  shall 
be  no  more  ?” 

Then  said  the  Interpreter  to  Christian, 

E 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


50 


“ Let  this  man’s  wails  be  dwelt  on  by  thee, 
and  cease  not  to  teach  thee  how  to  act.” 

“ Well,”  said  Christian,  “ this  is  dire ! 
God  help  me  to  watch  and  be  of  sound  mind, 
and  to  pray  that  I may  shun  each  cause  of 
this  man’s  woe.  Sir,  is  it  not  time  for  me  to 
go  on  my  way  now  ?” 

Inter. — “ Wait  till  I shall  show  thee  one 
thing  more,  and  then  thou  shalt  go  on  thy 
way.” 

So  he  took  Christian  by  the  hand  once 
more,  and  led  him  to  a room  where  one  did 
rise  out  of  bed  ; and  as  he  put  on  his  clothes 
he  did  shake  and  quake. 

Then  said  Christian,  “ Why  doth  this 
man  thus  shake  ?” 

The  Interpreter  then  bid  him  tell  to 
Christian  the  cause  of  this.  So  he  spoke  and 
.said,  “ This  night  as  I was  in  my  sleep  I 
dreamt,  and  lo,  the  sky  grew  black  as  ink, 
when  flame  flit  from  the  clouds;  on  which  I 
heard  a dread  noise,  that  put  me  in  throes  of 
pain.  So  1 did  lift  up  my  eyes  in  my  dream, 
and  saw  the  clouds  rack  at  a strange  rate, 
when  I heard  a great  sound  of  a trump,  and 


The  Interpreter  s Hotise.  51 

saw,  too,  a man  sit  on  a cloud,  with  a huge 
host  near  to  him  ; they  were  all  in  flames  of 
fire  ; while  the  sky,  too,  was  on  a fierce  flame. 
I heard,  then,  a voice  that  said,  ‘ Come  forth 
ye  dead  and  meet  your  Judge!’  And  with 
that  the  rocks  rent,  the  graves  did  gape,  and 
the  dead  that  were  in  them  came  forth.  Some 
of  them  were  most  glad,  and  held  high  their 
heads,  and  some  sought  to  hide  them  down 
at  the  base  of  the  mounts.  Then  I saw  the 
man  that  sat  on  the  cloud  fold  back  the  book 
and  bid  the  world  draw  near.  There  was  a 
wide  space  kept  clear  by  a hot  flame  that 
came  from  the  front  of  him,  and  cut  off  him 
and  them,  so  as  to  be  like  the  judge  and 
rogues  at  the  bar.  I heard  it,  in  like  way, 
told  to  them  that  were  near  the  man  that  sat 
on  the  cloud,  ‘ Bind  up  the  tares,  and  the 
chaff,  and  the  stalks,  and  cast  them  in  the 
lake  that  burns  with  fire.’  And  with  that  the 
huge  pit  did  yawn  just  where  I stood  ; out  of 
the  mouth  of  which  there  came  in  full  flow 
dense  smoke  and  coals  of  fire,  with  dread 
noise.  Then  said  the  voice  to  the  same  men, 

‘ Put  up  my  wheat  in  the  barn  !’  and  with 

E 2 


52 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


that  I saw  a host  caught  up  in  the  clouds, 
but  I was  left  stay.  In  like  way  I sought  to 
hide  my  head,  but  I could  not,  for  the  man 
hat  sat  on  the  cloud  still  kept  his  eye  on 
me  ; my  sins,  too,  came  to  my  mind,  and  I 
felt  qualms  look  where  I would.  Then  did  I 
wake  from  my  sleep.” 

Chr. — “ But  what  was  it  that  made  you 
so  quake  at  this  sight  ?” 

Man. — “ Why,  I thought  that  the  day  of 
doom  had  come,  and  that  I was  not  fit  to 
meet  it.  But  this  made  me  fear  most,  that 
some  were  caught  up  while  I was  left.  More 
than  this,  the  pit  of  hell  did  yawn  just  where 
I stood.  My  sense  of  guilt,  too,  gave  me 
grief ; and,  as  I thought,  the  Judge  kept  his 
eye  on  me,  while  his  looks  were  full  of  scorn.” 

Then  said  the  Interpreter  to  Christian, 
“Hast  thou  thought  well  on  all  these 
things?” 

Chr. — “ Yes  ; and  they  put  me  in  hope 
and  fear.” 

Inthr. — “ Well,  keep  all  things  so  in  thy 
mind  that  they  may  be  as  a goad  m thy  sides, 
to  prick  thee  on  in  the  way  thou  must  go.” 


The  Interpreter  s House. 


53 


Then  Christian  girt  up  his  loins,  and 
thought  but  of  the  long  road  he  had  to  tread. 
Then  said  the  Interpreter,  “ The  Lord  be 
at  all  times  with  thee,  good  Christian,  to 
guide  thee  in  the  way  that  leads  to  the  town.” 

So  Christian  went  on  his  way,  and  said 
the  while — 

Here  I have  seen  things  rare,  and  of  much  use  ; 

Things  that  did  please,  most  dread,  things  to  make  me 
Hold  fast  to  what  I do  now  take  in  hand : 

Then  let  me  ♦'hink  on  them,  and  try  to  know 
Why  they  weie  shown  to  me  ; and  let  me  give 
To  thee,  O good  Interpreter,  my  thanks.’* 


54 


CHAPTER  VI. 

THE  CROSS  AND  THE  CONTRAST. 

C)W  I saw  in  my  dream  that  the  high 
road,  up  whieh  Christian  was  to  go, 
had  on  eaeh  side  a wall  for  a fence, 
and  that  wall  went  by  the  name  of  Salvation. 
Up  this  way,  then,  did  Christian  run  with 
his  load,  which,  from  its  great  weight,  made 
him  puff  and  pant. 

He  ran  thus  till  he  came  to  a place  where 
was  a high  slope,  and  on  that  place  stood  a 
cross,  and  a short  way  from  it  in  the  vale, 
a tomb.  So  I saw  in  my  dream  that  just 
as  Christian  came  up  with  the  cross,  his  load 
got  loose  from  his  neck,  and  fell  from  off  his 
back,  and  did  roll  till  it  came  to  the  mouth 
of  the  grave,  where  it  fell  in,  and  I saw  it  no 
more. 

Then  was  Christian  full  glad,  and  said, 
with  a gay  heart,  “ He  hath  brought  me  rest 
by  his  grief,  and  life  by  his  death.”  Then  he 
stood  still  a short  time  to  look  with  awe,  for 


The  Cross  and  the  Contrast. 


55 


it  was  a strange  thing  to  him  that  the  sight 
of  the  cross  should  thus  ease  him  of  his  load. 
Hence  did  he  look  and  look  once  more,  till 
the  springs  that  were  in  his  heart  sent  streams 
down  his  cheeks.  Now  as  he  stood  in  tears, 
his  eyes  bent  on  the  cross,  lo,  three  Bright 
Ones  came  to  him,  and  did  greet  him  with 
“ Peace  be  to  thee.”  So  the  first  .said  to  him, 
“ Thou  art  free  from  thy  sins  the  next  stript 
him  of  his  rags,  and  put  on  him  a change  of 
clothes ; the  third,  too,  set  a mark  on  his 
brow,  and  gave  him  a roll  with  a seal  on  it, 
which  he  bid  him  look  on  as  he  ran,  and  that 
he  should  give  it  in  at  the  Celestial  Gate  ; so 
they  went  their  way.  Then  Christian  gave 
three  leaps  for  joy,  and  sang  in  this  strain  : — 


“ Thus  far  did  I come,  bent  down  with  my  sin, 

Nor  could  aught  ease  the  grief  that  I was  in. 

Till  I came  here  : what  a strange  place  is  this  ! 

Must  here  be  the  first  sweet  taste  of  my  bliss?  • 
Must  here  the  large  load  fall  from  off  my  back  ? 
Must  here  the  strings  that  bound  it  to  me  crack? 
Blest  cross  ! blest  tomb  ! but  still  the  more  blest  be 
The  Man  that  there  was  put  to  shame  for  me  !” 


I saw  then  in  my  dream  that  he  went  on 


56  The  Pilgrims  Progress. 

thus  till  he  came  to  a vale,  where  he  saw, 
a few  yards  out  of  the  way,  three  men  in 
deep  sleep,  with  gyves  on  their  heels.  The 
name  of  the  one  was  Simple ; the  next. 
Sloth  ; and  the  third.  Presumption. 

Christian  then,  as  he  saw  them  lie  in  this 
case,  went  to  them,  if  so  be  he  might  rouse 
them  ; so  he  said  in  a loud  voice,  “You  are 
like  them  that  sleep  on  the  top  of  a mast, 
for  the  Dead  Sea  is  low  down  at  your  feet, 
a gulph  that  no  plumb  line  can  sound  ; get 
up,  hence,  and  come  on.  But  will  it,  too, 
and  I will  help  you  off  with  your  chains.” 
He,  in  like  way,  told  them,  “ If  he  that  goes 
to  and  fro,  and  doth  roar  like  the  king  of 
beasts,  comes  by,  you  will,  of  a truth,  fall 
a prey  to  his  teeth.” 

With  this  they  gave  a glum  look  at 
him,  and  spoke  in  this  sort : Simple  said, 
“I  see  no  cause  to  fear;”  Sloth  said,  “Yet 
some  more  sleep;”  and  Presumption  said, 
“ Each  tub  must  stand  on  its  own  end.”  And 
so  they  lay  down  to  sleep  once  more,  and 
Christian  went  on  his  way. 

Yet  felt  he  grief  to  think  that  men  in  that 


The  Cross  and  the  Contrast. 


57 


sad  plight  should  so  spurn  the  kind  act  of 
him  that  of  his  own  free  will  sought  to  help 
them,  both  by  the  bout  to  wake  them,  sage 
words,  and  the  wish  to  help  them  off  with 
their  chains.  And  as  he  did  grieve  from  this 
cause,  he  saw  two  men  roll  off  a wall,  on  the 
left  hand  of  the  strait  way  ; and  they  made 
quick  pace  up  to  him.  The  name  of  the  one 
was  Formalist,  and  the  name  of  the  next 
Hypocrisy.  So,  as  I said,  they  drew  up  nigh 
him,  who  thus  held  speech  with  them. 

Chr. — “ Sirs,  whence  came  you,  and 
where  do  you  go  ?” 

Form,  and  Hyp. — “ We  were  born  in  the 
land  of  Vain-glory,  and  are  bent'  for  praise 
to  Mount  Zion.” 

Chr. — “Why  came  you  not  in  at  the 
gate  which  stands  at  the  head  of  the  way? 
Know  you  not  that  it  is  set  down,  that  ‘ he 
that  comes  not  in  by  the  door,  but  climbs 
up  some  back  way,  the 'same  is  a thief  and 
a rogue  ?'  ” 

They  said,  “ That  to  go  to  the  gate  to  get 
in  was  by  all  their  horde  thought  too  far 
round ; and  that  hence  the  way  they  were 


58 


The  Pil<zf^im  s Progress, 

<->  o 


wont  to  take  was  to  make  a short  cut  of  it, 
and  to  climb  the  wall  as  they  had  done.” 

Chr. — “ But  will  it  not  be  thought  a 
wrong  done  to  the  Lord  of  the  town  where 
we  are  bound,  thus  to  break  his  law  which 
he  hath  made  known  to  us  ?” 

They  told  him,  “ That  as  for  that,  he  need 
not  to  rack  his  head  on  that  score  ; for  what 
they  did  they  had  a right  to  do,  and  could 
bring,  if  need  be,  proof  that  would  bear  it 
out  for  a long  term  of  years.” 

“ But,”  said  Christian,  “ will  what  you  do 
stand  proof  at  law  ?” 

They  told  him,  “ That  this  act  of  theirs, 
as  it  stood  for  so  long  a time,  would  no  doubt 
be  thought  good  in  law  by  a just  judge;  and 
more  than  this,”  said  they,  “ if  we  get  in 
the  way,  what  boots  it  which  way  we  get  in  ? 
If  we  are  in,  we  are  in.  Thou  art  but  in  the 
way,  who,  as  we  see,  came  in  at  the  gate  ; 
and  we  too  are  in  the  way,  that  fell  from  the 
top  of  the  wall.  In  what,  now,  is  thy  state  a 
whit  more  good  than  ours?” 

CiiK. — “I  walk  by  the  rule  of  my  Lord; 
you  walk  by  the  rude  cjuirks  of  your  vague 


The  Cross  and  the  Cojitrast. 


59 


whims.  At  this  time  you  count  but  as  thieves 
in  the  sight  of  the  Lord  of  the  way  ; hence  I 
doubt  you  will  not  be  found  true  men  at  the 
end  of  the  way.  You  come  in  of  your  own 
will,  and  by  no  leave  of  his,  and  shall  go  out 
your  own  way,  with  no  chance  of  his  ruth.” 

To  this  they  said  but  few  words,  but  they 
bid  him  look  to  what  he  did.  Then  I saw 
that  they  went  on  each  man  in  his  way  ; nor 
held  they  speech,  save  that  these  two  men 
told  Christian,  “That  as  to  laws  and  rules, 
they  had  no  doubt  but  they  should  as  lief  do 
them  as  he.  For  which  cause,”  said  they, 
“ we  see  not  in  what  you  are  not  like  to  us,  but 
by  the  coat  that  is  on  thy  back,  which,  as  we 
trow,  you  got  from  some  of  your  friends  to 
hide  the  shame  of  your  nude  state.” 

Chr. — “ By  laws  and  rules  you  will  not 
get  safe,  since  you  came  not  in  by  the  door. 
And  as  for  this  coat  that  is  on  my  back,  I got 
it  from  the  Lord  of  the  place  to  which  I go  ; 
and  that,  as  you  say,  to  hide  my  nude  state 
with.  And  1 take  it  as  a sign  of  his  good  will 
to  me,  for  I had  naught  but  rags  till  then  ; 
and  more  than  this,  I have  joy  as  I go,  for  of 


6o  The  Pilorim  s Proo^7^es$, 

C>  O 

a truth,  think  I,  when  I come  to  the  gate  of 
the  town,  the  Lord  of  it  will  know  me  for 
good,  since  I have  his  coat  on  my  back  ; a 
coat  that  he  gave  me  of  his  own  free  will  the 
day  that  he  stript  me  of  my  rags.  I have, 
too,  a mark  on  my  brow,  which  you  may 
not  have  seen,  which  one  of  my  Lord’s  most 
stanch  friends  put  there,  in  the  day  that  my 
load  fell  from  off  my  back.  More  than  this, 
I will  tell  you  that  I then  got  a roll  with  a 
seal  on  it,  to  cheer  me  while  I read  it,  as  I 
go  on  the  way  : I was  told  to  give  it  in  at  the 
Celestial  Gate,  as  a sure  sign  that  I,  too, 
should  go  in  at  the  right  time  : all  which 
things  1 doubt  you  want,  and  want  them  for 
that  you  came  not  in  at  the  gate.” 

To  these  things  they  gave  him  not  a word, 
but  they  cast  a glance  each  on  each  and  did 
laugh.  Then  I saw  that  they  went  on  all, 
save  that  Christian  kept  in  front,  who  had  no 
more  talk,  but  did  muse  in  Ids  own  mind,  and 
that  one  time  with  sighs,  and  now  with  ease, 
lie  would,  too,  read  much  in  the  roll  that 
one  of  the  Lright  Ones  gave  him  which  did 
serve  to  brace  and  buoy  him  up. 


6i 


CHAPTER  VIT. 

THE  HILL  DIFFICULTY. 

SAW  then  that  they  all  went  on  till 
they  came  to  the  foot  of  the  Hill 
Difficulty,  at  the  end  of  which  was 
a spring.  There  were  in  the  same  place  two 
ways  more  than  that  which  came  straight 
from  the  gate : one  bent  to  the  left  hand,  and 
the  next  to  the  right,  at  the  base  of  the  hill  ; 
but  the  strait  way  lay  right  up  the  hill  ; and 
the  name  of  that  path  up  the  side  of  the  hill 
is  known  as  Difficulty.  Christian  now  went 
to  the  spring  and  drank  of  it  to  cool  his 
blood  and  quench  his  thirst,  and  then  he  set 
forth  to  go  up  the  hill,  while  he  said — 

“ The  hill,  though  high,  I much  long  for  to  climb, 

Nor  will  the  toil  now  cause  me  for  to  blench ; 

For  I see  plain  the  way  to  life  lies  here  : 

Come,  pluck  up,  heart,  let  me  nor  fear  nor  faint ; 

Best  far,  though  hard,  the  right  way  for  to  go, 

Than  wrong,  though  smooth,  where  the  end  is  woe.” 


The  two  with  whom  he  had  held  speech 


62 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


in  like  way  came  to  the  foot  of  the  hill ; but 
when  they  saw  that  the  hill  was  steep  and 
high,  and  that  there  were  two  more  ways-  to 
go,  and  as  they  thought  that  these  two  ways 
might  meet  in  the  long  run  with  that  up 
which  Christian  went,  on  the  rear  side  of  the 
hill ; hence  they  made  up  their  minds  to  go 
in  those  ways. 

Now  the  name  of  one  of  those  ways  was 
Danger,  and  the  name  of  the  next  Destruc- 
tion. So  the  one  took  the  way  which  is 
known  as  Danger,  which  led  him  to  a 
great  wood  ; and  he  who  was  with  him  took 
straight  up  the  way  to  Destruction,  which  led 
to  a wide  field  full  of  dark  cliffs,  where  he 
made  a slip,  and  fell,  and  rose  no  more. 

I then  cast  my  eyes  on  Christian,  and  I 
saw  that  from  a run  he  came  to  a walk,  and 
at  last  had  to  climb  on  his  hands  and  his 
knees,  so  steep  was  the  place. 

Now  half  the  way  to  the  top  of  the 
hill  was  a nook  made  of  trees,  fair  to  look 
on,  made  by  the  Lord  of  the  hill  for  the 
good  of  such  as  trod  that  place.  There, 
then,  Christian  got ; there,  too,  he  sat  down 


The  Hill  Difficulty. 


o 


to  rest  him.  Then  he  took  his  roll  out  of  his 
breast,  and  read  in  it  to  his  peace.  In  like 
way  did  he  look  once  more  on  the  coat,  or 
robe,  that  he  got  as  he  stood  by  the  cross. 

Thus  sought  he  cheer  a while,  when  he 
fell  to  doze,  and  then  went  off  in  a fast 
sleep,  which  kept  him  in  that  place  till  it  was 
just  night ; and  in  his  sleep  his  roll  fell  out 
of  his  hand. 

Now  as  he  slept  there  came  one  to  him, 
who  woke  him  and  said,  “ Go  to  the  ant, 
thou  man  of  sloth  ; think  of  her  ways,  and  be 
wise.”  And  with  that  Christian  did  start  up, 
and  went  on  till  he  came  to  the  top  of  the 
hill. 

Now  when  he  was  got  up  to  the  top  of 
the  hill,  there  came  two  men  who  ran  right 
up  to  him  so  as  to  push  him.  The  name 
of  the  one  was  Timorous,  and  of  the  next 
Mistrust  ; to  whom  Christian  said,  “ Sirs, 
what  doth  ail  you  ? You  run  the  wrong 
way.” 

Timorous  said  that  they  were  bound  to 
the  City  of  Zion,  and  had  got  up  to  that  hard 
place;  “but,”  said  he,  “the  more  we  go  on 


64 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


the  more  risks  we  meet  with  ; hence  did  we 
turn,  and  mean  not  to  go  back.” 

“ Yes,”  said  Mistrust,  “ for  just  in  front 
of  us  lie  a brace  of  wild  beasts  in  the  way 
— that  they  sleep  or  wake  we  know  not — 
and  we  could  not  think  if  we  came  in  their 
reach  but  they  would  at  once  pull  us  in  bits.” 

Then  said  Christian,  “ You  rouse  my 
fears:  but  where  shall  I flee  to  be  safe?  If 
I go  back  to  mine  own  land,  it  is  to  be 
burnt  with  fire,  and  I shall  of  a truth  be 
lost  there  : if  I can  get  to  the  Celestial  City  I 
am  sure  to  be  quite  safe  there.  I must  take 
the  chance  : to  go  back  is  naught  but  death ; 
to  go  on  is  fear  of  death,  and  life  that  lasts 
then  to  come.  I will  yet  go  on.” 

Then  Mistrust  and  Timorous  ran  down 
the  hill,  and  Christian  went  on  his  way.  But 
as  he  dwelt  on  what  he  heard  from  the  men, 
he  felt  in  his  breast  for  his  roll,  that  he  might 
read  in  it  and  get  ease  ; but  he  felt  and  found 
it  not.  Then  was  Christian  in  great  grief, 
and  knew  not  what  to  do,  for  he  sought  that 
which  was  wont  to  bring  him  peace,  and  that 
which  should  have  been  his  pass  to  the 


The  Hill  Difficulty. 


65 


Celestial  City.  Here,  then,"  he  grew  in  a 
maze,  and  knew  not  what  to  do.  At  last  he 
brought  to  mind  that  he  had  slept  in  the 
nook  that  is  on  the  side  of  the  hill,  when 
he  fell  down  on  his  knees  and  did  ask  God 
to  cleanse  him  from  that  weak  act,  and  then 
went  back  to  look  for  his  roll.  But  all  the 
way  he  went  back,  who  can  with  full  force  set 
forth  the  woes  of  Christian’s  heart  ? At  one 
time  he  would  sigh ; then  he  wept,  and  did 
chide  him  for  his  lack  of  sense  in  that  he  fell 
to  sleep  in  that  place,  which  was  built  but  for 
a slight  rest  on  the  way.  Thus,  then,  he 
went  back,  his  looks  bent  on  this  side  and  on 
that  all  the  way  he  went,  if  so  be  he  might 
find  the  roll  that  had  been  his  joy  more  than 
once  while  on  the  road.  He  went  thus  till 
he  came  in  sight  of  the  place  where  he  sat 
and  slept ; but  that  sight  gave  him  the  more 
grief  as  it  brought  back  his  vile  sin  of  sloth 
to  his  mind.  Thus,  then,  he  now  went  on 
to  wail  for  his  sleep  of  sin,  and  said,  “ O 
base  man  that  I am ! that  I should  sleep 
while  it  was  day  ! that  I should  sleep  in  the 
midst  of  toil ! that  I should  so  feast  the  flesh 


66  The  Pilgrims  Progress 

as  to  use  that  rest  for  ease  to  my  flesh  which 
the  Lord  of  the  hill  hath  built  but  for  those 
who  grow  faint  of  soul  by  the  way!  What 
scores  of  steps  have  I made  in  vain  I Thus 
did  it  hap  to  Israel  for  their  sin  ; they  were 
sent  back  once  more  by  the  way  of  the  Red 
Sea,  and  I am  made  to  tread  those  steps  with 
grief  which  I might  have  trod  with  joy  had 
it  not  been  for  this  vile  sleep.  How  far  might 
I have  been  on  my  way  by  this  time  I I am 
made  to  tread  those  steps  thrice  in  turn 
which  I need  to  have  trod  but  once ; yea, 
now,  more  than  this,  I am  like  to  fall  in  with 
night,  for  the  day  is  all  but  spent.  Oh,  that 
I had  not  slept  I” 

Now  by  this  time  he  was  come  to  the 
nook  once  more,  where  for  a while  he  sat 
down  and  wept ; but  at  last  (as  Christian 
would  have  it),  he  gave  a sad  look  at  the  foot 
of  the  bench,  and  there  he  saw  his  lost  roll  ; 
the  which  he  with  fear  and  haste  caught  up 
and  put  in  his  breast.  But  who  can  tell  how 
full  of  joy  this  man  was  when  he  had  come 
by  his  lost  roll  ? For  this  roll  was  the  pledge 
of  his  life,  and  the  means  by  which  he  could 


The  Hill  Difficulty. 


67 


go  in  and  find  good  will  at  the  place  he 
sought.  For  this  cause  he  laid  it  up  in  his 
breast,  gave  thanks  to  God  for  that  he  did 
cause  his  eye  to  rest  on  the  spot  where  it  lay, 
and  with  joy  and  tears  he  once  more  set  out 
on  his  route.  But  oh,  how  quick  now  did  he 
go  up  the  rest  of  the  hill ! Yet  ere  he  got  up 
the  sun  went  down  on  Christian  ; and  this 
made  him  once  more  think  how  vain  it  was 
for  him  to  have  sunk  to  sleep ; and  thus  did 
he  try  to  soothe  his  heart : “ O thou  vile 
sleep ! how  for  thy  sake  am  I like  to  fall  in 
with  night  while  on  the  road  ! I must  walk 
and  find  no  light  of  sun,  while  night  must 
shroud  the  path  of  my  feet,  and  I must  hear 
the  noise  of  wild  beasts,  and  all  through 
this  vile  sleep  \”  Now,  in  like  way,  he 
brought  to  mind  the  tale  that  Mistrust  and 
Timorous  had  told  him  of  how  they  took 
fright  at  the  sight  of  the  wild  beasts.  Then 
did  Christian  muse  thus:  “These  beasts 
range  in  the  night  for  their  prey ; and  if 
they  should  meet  with  me  in  the  dark,  how 
should  I shift  them  ? how  should  I get  free 
from  their  fangs  ? they  would  tear  me  to 


68 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


bits.”  Thus  he  went  on  his  way.  But,  while 
he  did  mourn  his  dire  hap,  he  lift  up  his 
eyes,  and  lo,  there  was  a grand  house  in 
front  of  him,  the  name  of  which  was  Beauti- 
ful, and  it  stood  just  on  the  side  of  the  high 
road. 


69 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

THE  PALACE  BEAUTIFUL. 

O I saw  in  my  dream  that  he  made 
haste  and  went  forth,  that,  if  so  be, 
he  might  get  a place  to  lodge  there. 
Now  ere  he  had  gone  far,  he  came  to  a strait 
lane  which  was  not  a long  way  off  of  the 
Porter’s  lodge  ; and,  as  he  kept  a sharp  look 
out  as  he  went,  he  saw  two  wild  beasts  in 
the  way.  “ Now,”  thought  he,  “I  see  what 
it  was  drove  back  Mistrust  and  Timorous.” 
(The  beasts  were  made  fast,  but  he  saw  not 
the  chains.)  Then  he  took  fright,  and  thought 
in  like  way  to  go  back  as  they  had  done ; lor 
he  thought  death  of  a truth  did  face  him.  But 
when  the  man  at  the  lodge,  whose  name  is 
Watchful,  saw  that  Christian  made  a halt,  as 
if  he  would  go  back,  he  did  cry  to  him  and 
say,  “ Is  thy  strength  so  small  ? Fear  not 
the  wild  beasts,  for  they  are  in  chains,  and  are 
put  there  for  test  of  faith  where  it  is,  and  to 
make  known  those  that  have  none:  keep  in 


70  The  Pilgrims  Progress. 

the  midst  of  the  path,  and  no  hurt  shall  come 
to  thee.” 

Then  I saw  that  he  went  on  to  shake  for 
fear  of  the  wild  beasts ; but  as  he  paid  good 
heed  to  the  words  of  the  Porter,  he  heard 
them  roar,  but  they  did  him  no  harm.  Then 
did  he  clap  his  hands,  and  went  on  till  he 
came  and  stood  in  front  of  the  gate  where 
the  Porter  was.  Then  said  Christian  to  the 
Porter,  “ Sir,  what  house  is  this  ? and  may  I 
lodge  here  this  night?”  The  Porter  said, 
“ This  house  was  built  by  the  Lord  of  the 
hill,  and  he  built  it  to  aid  and  guard  such  as 
speed  this  way.”  The  Porter,  in  like  way, 
sought  to  know  whence  he  was  ? and  to  what 
place  he  was  bound  ? 

Chr. — “ I am  come  from  the  City  of 
Destruction  ; and  am  on  my  way  to  Mount 
Zion  ; but  as  the  sun  is  now  set,  I wish,  if 
I may,  to  lodge  here  this  night.” 

PoR. — “What  is  your  name?” 

CiiR. — “ My  name  is  now  Christian,  but 
my  name  at  the  first  was  Graceless : I came 
of  the  race  of  Japhet,  whom  God  will  cause 
t ) Jwcll  in  the  tents  of  Shem.” 


The  Palace  Beautiful. 


71 


PoR. — “ But  how  doth  it  hap  that  you 
come  so  late  ? The  sun  is  set.” 

Chr. — “ I had  been  here  ere  this,  but  that, 
mean  man  that  I am,  I slept  in  the  nook 
that  stands  on  the  side  of  the  hill.  Nay,  I 
had,  if  that  was  not  so,  been  here  long  since, 
but  that  in  my  sleep  I lost  my  roll,  and  in 
this  state  came  to  the  brow  of  the  hill  ; and 
then,  as  I felt  for  it,  but  found  it  not,  I had 
with  grief  of  heart  to  go  back  to  the  place 
where  I slept  my  sleep  ; where  I found  it,  and 
now  I am  come.” 

PoR. — “Well,  I will  call  out  one  of  the 
maids  of  this  place,  who  will,  if  she  likes 
your  talk,  bring  you  in  to  the  rest  of  the 
folk,  as  such  are  the  rules  of  the  house.” 

So  Watchful  rang  a bell,  at  the  sound  of 
which  came  out  at  the  door  of  the  house  a 
grave  and  fair  maid,  whose  name  was  Dis- 
cretion. who  would  know  why  she  had  got 
a call. 

The  Porter  said,  “ This  man  is  in  the  way 
from  the  City  of  Destruction  to  Mount  Zion, 
but  as  he  doth  tire,  and  as  night  came  on,  he 
sought  to  know  if  he  might  lodge  here  for  the 


72 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


night : so  I told  him  I would  call  for  thee, 
who,  when  thou  dost  speak  with  him,  may  do 
as  seems  to  thee  good,  and  act  up  to  the  law 
of  the  house." 

Then  she  would  know  whence  he  was,  and 
to  what  place  he  was  bound ; and  he  told  her. 
She  would  know,  too,  how  he  got  in  the  way  ; 
and  he  told  her.  Then  did  she  ask  him  what 
he  had  seen  and  met  with  in  the  way ; and 
he  told  her.  And  at  last  she  would  know 
his  name.  So  he  said,  “ It  is  Christian  ; and 
I have  so  much  the  more  wish  to  lodge  here 
this  night,  for  that,  as  I think,  this  place  was 
built  by  the  Lord  of  the  hill  so  as  to  help  and 
guard  those  who  wax  worn  by  the  way."  So 
a smile  sat  on  her  lips,  but  the  tears  stood  in 
her  eyes  ; and,  when  she  gave  a short  pause, 
she  said,  “ I will  call  forth  two  o‘r  three  more 
of  those  who  dwell  here.”  So  she  ran  to  the 
door,  and  did  call  out  Prudence,  Piety,  and 
Charity  ; and  when  she  had  held  more  speech 
with  him,  he  was  brought  in,  and  made 
known  to  all  who  dwelt  in  the  house,  some  of 
whom  met  him  at  the  porch,  and  said,  “ Come 
in,  thou  whom  the  Lord  doth  bless ; this 


The  Palace  Beautifiil. 


73 


house  was  built  by  the  Lord  of  the  hill,  to 
give  good  cheer  to  such-  who,  like  you,  grow 
faint  by  the  way.”  Then  he  bent  his  head, 
and  went  in  with  them  to  the  house.  So 
when  he  was  come  in  and  set  down,  they 
gave  him  to  drink,  and  then  they  thought 
that  till  the  last  meal  was  brought  up,  some 
of  them  should  have  some  wise  talk  with 
Christian,  so  as  to  make  good  use  of  time ; 
and  Piety,  and  Prudence,  and  Charity  were 
bade  to  speak  with  him,  which  they  did  in 
this  wise : — 

Pi. — “ Come,  good  Christian,  since  we 
have  shown  such  love  for  you  as  to  make 
you  our  guest  this  night,  let  us,  if  so  be  we 
may  each  get  good  by  it,  talk  with  you  of  all 
things  that  you  have  met  with  on  your  way.” 

Chr. — “ With  a right  good  will ; and  I 
am  glad  your  mind  is  so  well  bent.” 

Pi. — “ What  led  you  at  first  to  take  to  this 
mode  of  life  ?” 

Chr. — “ I had  to  flee  from  my  own  land 
by  a dire  sound  that  was  in  my  ears ; to  wit, 
that  a sure  curse  would  rest  orkme  if  I staid 
in  that  place  where  I was.” 


74 


The  Pilgrinis  Progress. 


Pi. — “ But  how  was  it  that  you  came  out 
of  your  land  this  way  ?’’ 

Cur. — “ It  was  as  God  would  have  it ; 
for  when  I was  full  of  the  fears  of  doom,  I 
did  not  know  where  to  go  ; but  by  chance 
there  came  a man  then  to  me,  whilst  I shook 
and  wept,  whose  name  is  Evangelist,  and  he 
told  me  how  to  reach  the  small  gate,  which 
else  I should  not  have  found,  and  so  set  me 
in  the  way  that  hath  led  me  straight  to  this 
house.” 

Pi. — " But  did  you  not  come  by  the  house 
of  the  Interpreter  ?” 

Chr. — “Yes,  and  did  see  such  things 
there,  the  thoughts  of  which  will  stick  by 
me  as  long  as  I live  ; in  chief,  three  things ; 
to  wit,  how  Christ,  in  spite  \)f  the  Foe  of 
Man,  keeps  up  his  work  of  grace  in  the 
heart ; how  the  man,  through  sin,  had  got 
quite  out  of  hopes  of  God’s  ruth  ; and,  in  like 
way,  the  dream  of  him  that  thought  in  his 
sleep  the  day  of  doom  was  come.” 

Pi. — “ Why,  did  you  hear  him  tell  his 
dream  ?”  ♦ 

CiiR. — “ Yes.  and  a dire  dream  it  was,  I 


TJie  Palace  Beautiful. 


75 


thought ; it  made  my  heart  ache  to  hear  him 
tell  of  it : but  yet  I am  glad  I heard  it.” 

Pi. — ^Was  this  all  you  saw  at  the  house  of 
the  Interpreter?” 

Chr. — “ No ; he  took  me  and  had  me 
where  I was  shown  a grand  house,  and  how 
those  were  clad  in  gold  that  were  in  it ; and 
how  there  came  a bold  man,  and  cut  his  way 
through  the  men  in  arms  that  stood  in  the 
door  to  keep  him  out,  and  how  he  was  bid 
come  in  and  win  that  bliss  that  knows  no 
end.  I thought  those  things  did  steep  my 
heart  in  joy.” 

Pi. — “ And  what  saw  you  else  in  the 
way? 

Chr. — “ Saw ! Why,  I went  but  a wee 
way  and  I saw  One,  as  I thought  in  my 
mind,  hang  and  bleed  on  a tree ; and  the 
sheer  sight  of  him  made  my  load  fall  off  my 
back ; for  I did  groan  through  the  great 
weight,  but  then  it  fell  down  from  off  me.  It 
was  a strange  thing  to  me,  for  up  to  that 
time  I saw  not  such  a thing  in  my  life  ; yea, 
and  while  I stood  and  cast  up  ;»my  eyes  (for 
then  I could  not  help  but  look),  three  Bright 


76 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


Ones  came  to  me.  One  of  them  told  me  that 
I was  made  clean  from  my  sins  ; the  next 
stript  me  of  my  rags,  and  gave  me  this  coat, 
on  which  is  wrought  rich  work,  as  you  see ; 
and  the  third  set  the  mark  which  you  see  on 
my  brow,  and  gave  me  this  roll  with  a seal 
to  it,”  and  with  that  he  did  pluck  it  out  of 
his  breast. 

/ 

Pi. — “ But  you  saw  more  than  this,  did 
you  not  ?” 

Chr. — "The  things  that  I have  told  you 
were  the  best ; yet  some  more  things  I saw, 
as,  first  of  all,  I saw  three  men,  Simple, 
Sloth,  and  Presumption,  lie  in  sleep,  not  far 
out  of  the  way  as  I came,  with  gyves  on  their 
heels;  but  do  you  think  I could  rouse  them? 
I saw,  in  like  way.  Formalist  and  Hypocrisy 
come  and  roll  from  the  top  of  a wall,  to  go,  as 
they  fain  would  have  me  think,  to  Zion  ; but 
they  were  lost  in  a trice,  just  as  I did  tell 
them ; but  they  would  not  heed  my  words. 
But,  more  than  all,  I found  it  hard  work  to 
get  up’  this  hill,  and  as  hard  to  come  by  the 
wild  beasts’  mouths  : and,  in  sooth,  if  it  had 
not  been  for  the  good  man  the  Porter,  that 


The  Palace  Beautiful. 


77 


stands  at  the  gate,  I do  not  know  but  that 
in  spite  of  all  I might  have  gone  back  once 
more  ; but  now,  I thank  God,  I am  here ; and 
I thank  you  for  that  you  brought  me  in.” 

Then  Prudence  thought  good  to  ask  him 
a few  things,  of  which  to  speak  as  he  knew. 

Pr. — “ Do  you  think  at  times  of  the  land 
from  whence  you  came?” 

Chr. — “ Yes,  but  with  much  shame  and 
hate.” 

Pr. — “ Do  you  not  yet  bear  hence  with 
you  some  of  the  things  that  you  well  knew 
there  ?” 

Chr. — “ Yes,  but  much  in  strife  with  my 
will ; the  more  so  the  crass  thoughts  of  my 
heart,  with  which  all  the  folk  of  my  land,  as 
well  as  I,  would  find  joy ; but  now  all  those 
things  are  my  grief,  and  might  I but  choose 
mine  own  things,  I would  choose  not  to  think 
of  those  things  more ; but  when  I would  do 
that  which  is  best,  that  which  is  worst  is 
with  me.” 

Pr. — “ Do  you  not  find  now  and  then  as 
if  those  things  were  in  thrall  which  at  times 
set  you  in  a maze  ?” 


78 


The  Pilgrinis  Progress. 


Chr. — “Yes,  but  that  is  but  rare;  but 
they  are  to  me  bright  hours  in  which  such 
things  come  to  me.” 

Pr. — “ Can  you  bring  to  mind  by  what 
means  you  find  your  thorns  in  the  flesh  at 
times  as  if  they  were  in  thrall  ?” 

Chr. — “Yes;  when  I think  what  I saw  at 
the  cross,  that  will  do  it ; and  when  I look 
on  my  rich  coat,  that  will  do  it ; in  like  way 
when  I look  in  and  read  the  roll  I bear  in  my 
breast,  that  will  do  it;  and  when  my  thoughts 
wax  warm  as  to  the  place  where  I am  bound, 
that  will  do  it.” 

Pr. — “ And  what  is  it  that  makes  you  so 
long  to  go  to  Mount  Zion  ?” 

Chr. — “Why,  there  I hope  to  see  Him 
live  that  did  hang  dead  on  the  cross;  and 
there  I hope  to  be  rid  of  all  those  things  that 
to  this  day  are  in  me  and  do  vex  me  ; there 
they  say  there  is  no  death  ; and  there  I shall 
dwell  with  such  folk  as  I like  best.  For,  to 
tell  you  the  truth,  I love  Him  for  that  by  Him 
I got  ease  from  my  load  ; and  I tire  of  that 
which  makes  sick  my  soul.  I would  fain  be 
v\here  I should  die  no  more,  and  with  the 


The  Palace  Beautiful. 


79 


host  that  shall  not  cease  to  sing  songs  of 
praise  to  Him  who  was  slain.” 

Then  said  Charity  to  Christian,  “ Have 
you  bairns,  and  have  you  a wife  ?” 

Chr. — “ I have  a wife  and  four  small 
bairns.” 

Char. — “ And  why  did  you  not  bring 
them  on  with  you  ?” 

Then  Christian  wept  and  said,  “ Oh,  fain 
would  I have  done  it ! but  they  were  all  of 
themloath  to  let  me  leave  them.” 

Char. — “ But  you  should  have  sought  to 
show  them  the  risks  they  ran  when  they 
held  back.” 

Chr. — “ So  I did ; and  told  them,  too, 
that  God  had  shown  to  me  how  that  our 
town  would  come  to  wrack ; but  they  thought 
I did  but  mock,  and  they  put  no  faith  in 
what  I said.” 

Char. — “And  did  you  pray  to  God  that 
he  would  bless  your  words  to  them  ?” 

Chr. — “ Yes,  and  that  with  much  love, 
for  you  must  think  that  my  wife  and  poor 
bairns  were  most  dear  to  me.” 

Char. — “ But  did  you  tell  them  your  own 


So 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


grief  and  fear  of  bale?  for  I dare  say  that 
dire  doom  was  quite  plain  to  you.” 

Chr. — “ Yes,  more  times  than  I can  tell. 
They  might,  too,  have  seen  my  fears  in  my 
face,  in  my  tears,  and  when  I shook  through 
dread  of  the  woes  that  did  seem  so  nigh  : but 
all  was  in  vain  ; I could  not  get  them  to  come 
with  me.” 

Char. — “ But  what  could  they  say  to  show 
cause  why  they  came  not  ?” 

Chr. — “Why,  my  wife  was  loath  to  lose 
this  world  ; and  my  bairns  were  bent  on  the 
rash  joys  of  youth  : so,  what  by  this  thing, 
and  what  by  that  thing,  they  left  me  to  roam 
in  this  lone  way.” 

Char. — “ But  did  you  not  with  your  vain 
life  damp  all  that  you  by  words  made  use  of 
as  force  to  bring  them  off  with  you  ?” 

Chr. — “ In  sooth,  I must  not  say  aught 
for  my  life,  as  I know  full  well  what  blurs 
there  are  in  it.  I know,  too,  that  a man  by 
his  deeds  may  soon  set  at  naught  what  by 
sound  speech  and  wit  of  words  he  doth  strive 
to  fix  on  some  for  their  good.  Yet  this  I can 
say,  I took  heed  not  to  give  them  cause,  by  a 


The  Palace  Beautiful.  8i 

false  act,  to  shirk  the  step  I took,  and  not 
set  out  with  me.  Yea,  for  this  sole  thing 
they  would  tell  me  I was  too  nice ; and  that  I 
would  not  touch  of  things  (for  their  sakes)  in 
which  they  saw  no  guile.  Nay,  I think  I may 
say  that,  if  what  they  saw  in  me  did  hold  them 
back,  it  was  my  great  fear  lest  I should  sin  in 
the  face  of  God,  or  do  wrong  to  those  whom 
I am  bound  to  love.” 

Char. — “ In  truth,  Cain  did  hate  him  who 
came  of  the  same  blood,  for  that  his  works 
were  bad,  and  Abel’s  not  so ; and  if  thy  wife 
and  bairns  have  thought  ill  of  thee  for  this, 
they  show  by  it  that  they  are  foes  to  good ; 
and  thou  hast  set  free  thy  soul  from  their 
blood.” 

Now  I saw  in  my  dream  that  thus  they 
sat  and  spoke  each  to  each  till  the  meal  was 
laid  on  the  board.  So  in  due  time  they  sat 
down  to  meat.  Now  the  board  was  fraught 
with  fat  things,  and  of  wine  free  from  lees  ; 
and  all  their  talk  while  they  ate  was  of  the 
Lord  of  the  hill  ; as,  in  sooth,  of  what  he  had 
done,  and  why  it  was  he  did  what  he  did,  and 
why  he  had  built  that  house : and  by  what 


82 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


they  said  I saw  that  he  had  been  a man  great 
at  arms,  and  had  fought  with  and  slain  him 
that  had  the  sway  of  death ; but  not  free 
from  great  risk  to  his  own  life ; which  made 
me  love  him  the  more. 

For,  as  they  said,  and  as  I think,  said 
Christian,  he  did  it  with  the  loss  of  much 
blood.  But  that  which  shed  bright  gleams 
of  grace  on  all  he  did  was,  that  he  did  it  out 
of  pure  love  to  his  land.  And,  more  than 
this,  there  were  some  of  them  of  the  house 
that  said  they  had  seen  and  spoke  with  him 
since  he  did  die  on  the  cross  ; and  they  vow 
that  they  had  it  from  his  own  lips,  that  he 
loves  so  much  poor  wights  who  take  the 
right  way  that  the  like  is  not  to  be  found 
from  the  east  to  the  west. 

They,  in  like  way,  gave  prompt  proof  of 
what  they  said,  and  that  was,  he  had  stript 
him  of  his  rich  robes,  that  he  might  do  this 
for  the  poor ; and  that  they  heard  him  say, 
with  stern  stress,  that  he  would  not  dwell  in 
the  Mount  of  Zion  in  a lone  way.  They 
said,  too,  that  he  made  a host  of  poor  ones 
kings,  though  by  the  law  of  their  birth  they 


The  Palace  Beautijul, 


«3 

were  born  to  live  on  bare  alms,  and  their  first 
state  had  been  low  and  bad. 

Thus  they  spoke,  this  one  to  that  one,  till 
late  at  night ; and  when  they  had  put  them 
in  the  Lord’s  care  they  went  to  rest.  The 
Pilgrim  they  laid  in  a large  room  at  the  top 
of  the  house,  the  front  of  which  did  face  the 
east ; the  name  of  the  room  was  Peace  ; where 
he  slept  till  break  of  day,  and  then  he  woke 
and  sang — 

Where  am  I now?  Is  this  the  love  and  care 

Of  Christ  for  such  as  me,  so  poor  and  bare  ! 

My  sins  are  gone,  my  heart  and  soul  do  rise; 

I dwell  while  here  just  next  door  to  the  skies  !” 

So  in  the  morn  they  all  got  up  ; and  when 
they  had  held  some  more  speech,  they  told 
him  that  he  should  not  leave  till  they  had 
shown  him  the  rare  sights  of  the  place.  And 
first  they  led  him  to  a quiet  room,  where  he 
was  shown  books  of  great  age  ; in  which,  as 
I think  of  my  dream,  they  did  show  him,  first 
the  roll  of  the  race  of  the  Lord  of  the  hill, 
that  he  was  the  Son  of  the  Ancient  of  Days, 
and  came  of  a stock  not  born  in  time  and 


84 


The  Pilgrim  s Progress. 


that  had  no  end.  Here,  too,  were  set  down 
in  full  form  the  acts  that  he  had  done,  and 
the  names  of  a host  that  he  had  brought  to 
serve  him ; and  how  he  had  put  each  in  a 
house  not  made  with  hands,  that  nor  length 
of  days  nor  wrack  of  worlds  can  raze. 

Then  they  read  to  him  some  of  the  brave 
acts  that  some  of  those  had  done  : and  once 
more,  but  not  in  the  same  part  of  the  rolls  of 
the  house,  where  it  was  shown  how  their 
Lord  did  will  to  grant  his  grace  to  such  as 
sought  it,  though  they  in  time  past  were  wont 
to  scout  at  him  and  scoff  at  his  works.  Here, 
too,  were  a lot  more  rolls,  rife  with  things  of 
fame,  of  all  which  Christian  had  a view : as 
of  things  old  and  new  ; with  that  which  seers 
have  said,  that  have  come  to  pass,  both  to  the 
dread  and  bale  of  foes,  and  the  ease  and  peace 
of  those  who  toil  in  the  way. 

The  next  day  they  took  him  and  had  him 
in  the  place  in  which  arms  were  kept,  where 
he  was  shown  all  sorts  of  things  which  their 
Lord  had  put  there  for  such  as  he,  as  sword, 
shield,  casque,  plate  for  breast,  All-pyaycr, 
and  shoes  that  would  not  vvear  out.  And  there 


The  Palace  Beautiful. 


85 


was  here  as  much  of  this  as  would  fit  out  a 
host  of  men  to  serve  the  Lord,  as  there  be 
stars  in  the  skies,  great  as  they  are. 

In  like  way  did  they  show  him  some  of 
the  means  with  which  some  of  his  friends 
had  done  things  that  strike  one  with  awe. 
He  was  shown  Moses’  rod,  the  sledge  and 
nail  with  which  Jael  slew  Sisera,  the  jugs, 
horns,  and  lamps,  too,  with  which  Gideon 
put  to  flight  the  hosts  of  Midian.  Then 
was  he  shown  the  ox  goad  with  which 
Shamgar  slew  thrice  ten  score  men.  He  was 
shown,  in  like  way,  the  jaw-bone  of  the  ass 
with  which  Samson  did  such  great  feats. 
More  than  this,  he  was  shown  the  sling  and 
stone  with  which  David  slew  Goliath  of 
Gath ; as  well  as  the  sword  with  which  their 
Lord  will  “kill  the  Man  of  Sin”  in  the  day 
that  he  shall  rise  up  to  the  prey.  But  more 
things  still  were  shown  to  him,  in  all  of 
which  Christian  felt  much  joy.  This  done, 
they  went  to  their  rest  once  more. 

Then  I saw  in  my  dream  that  on  the 
morn  he  got  up  to  go  forth,  but  they  fain 
would  have  him  stay  till  the  rio?c|  duy  | ■'  un4 


86 


The  Pilgrim  s Progress. 


then,”  said  they,  “we  will,  if  the  day  be  clear, 
show  you  the  Delectable  Mountains,  which,’’ 
they  said,  “ would  yet  the  more  add  to  his 
bliss,  for  that  they  were  yet  more  nigh  the 
port  than  the  place  where  at  that  time  he 
was.”  So  he  thought  it  well  to  stay. 

When  the  morn  was  up,  they  had  him  to 
the  top  of  the  house,  and  bid  him  look  south: 
so  he  did,  and  lo,  a long  way  off,  he  saw  a 
fair  land,  full  of  high  hills,  clad  with  woods, 
vine  grounds,  fruits  of  all  sorts,  plants  as 
well,  with  springs  and  founts,  most  bright  to 
look  on.  Then  he  would  know  the  name  of 
the  land.  They  said  it  was  Immanuel’s  Land; 
“and  it  is  as  free,”  said  they,  “as  this  hill 
is  to  and  for  all  that  are  in  the  way.  And 
when  thou  dost  come  there  from  thence,”  said 
they,  “ thou  canst  see  to  the  gate  of  the 
Celestial  City,  as  those  who  watch  their  flocks 
and  live  there  will  show  thee.” 

Now  he  thought  it  was  due  time  to  set 
forth,  and  they  were  glad  that  he  should. 
“ But  first,”  said  they,  “ let  us  go  once  more 
to  where  the  arms  arc  kept.”  So  they  did. 
And  when  he  came  there  they  clad  him  in 


The  Palace  Beautiful. 


87 


coat  of  mail,  which  was  of  proof,  from  head 
to  foot,  lest  he  should  chance  meet  with  foes 
in  the  way. 

He  then,  in  this  gear,  came  out  with  his 
friends  to  the  gate,  and  there  he  would  know 
of  the  Porter  “ if  he  saw  one  pass  by?” 

Then  the  Porter  said  “Yes.” 

Chr. — “ Pray  did  you  know  him  ?” 

PoR. — “ I did  ask  his  name,  and  he  told 
me  it  was  Faithful.” 

“ Oh,”  said  Christian,  “ I know  him  : he 
is  from  the  same  town,  and  lives  nigh  to 
where  I dwell  : he  comes  from  the  place 
where  I was  born.  How  far  do  you  think 
he  may  be  on  the  road  ?” 

PoR. — “ He  has  got  by  this  time  more 
than  to  the  foot  of  the  hill.” 

“Well,”  said  Christian,  “good  Porter,  the 
Lord  be  with  thee,  and  add  to  all  things  that 
bless  thee  more  and  more,  for  the  kind  acts 
that  thou  hast  shown  to  me.’ 

Then  he  set  forth  : but  Discretion,  Piety, 
Charity,  and  Prudence  would  go  with  him 
down  to  the  foot  of  the  hill.  So  they  went 
on  side  by  side,  and  spoke  once  more  of  the 


88 


The  Pilgrim  s Progress. 


same  things  they  had  erst  made  the  gist  of 
speech,  till  they  came  to  go  down  the  hill. 
Then  said  Christian,  “As  it  was  hard  to 
come  up,  so,  so  far  as  I can  see,  it  is  a risk 
to  go  down.”  “ Yes,”  said  Prudence,  “ so  it 
is  ; for  it  is  a hard  thing  for  a man  to  go 
down  in  the  Vale  of  Humiliation,  as  thou 
art  now,  and  to  catch  no  slip  by  the  way ; 
hence,”  said  they,  “ we  are  come  out  to  see 
thee  safe  down  the  hill.”  So  he  strove  to  go 
down,  but  with  great  heed ; yet  he  caught  a 
slip  or  two. 

Then  I saw  in  my  dream  that  these  good 
friends,  when  Christian  was  gone  down  to 
the  foot  of  the  hill,  gave  him  a loaf  of  bread, 
a flask  of  wine,  and  a bunch  of  dry  grapes ; 
and  then  he  went  on  his  way. 


89 


CHAPTER  IX. 

APOLLYON. 

UT  now,  in  this  Vale  of  Humilia- 
tion, poor  Christian  was  hard  put  to 
it ; for  he  had  gone  but  a short  way, 
when  he  saw  a foul  fiend  come  through  the 
field  to  meet  him : his  name  is  Apollyon. 
Then  did  Christian  feel  some  fear,  and  cast  in 
his  mind  if  he  should  go  back  or  stand  his 
ground.  But  he  dwelt  on  the  fact  that  he 
had  no  gear  for  his  back  ; and  hence  thought 
that  to  turn  the  back  to  him  might  give  him 
the  means  with  ease  to  pierce  him  with  his 
darts  : so  he  made  up  his  mind  to  take  the 
risk,  and  stand  his  ground  : “ for,”  thought 
he,  “ had  I no  more  in  mine  eye  than  to  save 
my  life,  it  would  be  the  best  way  to  stand.” 

So  he  went  on,  and  Apollyon  met  him. 
Now  the  ghoul  did  shock  one’s  eyes  to  look 
on  : he  was  clad  with  scales  like  a fish  (and 
they  are  his  pride) ; he  had  wings  like  a huge 
bat,  feet  like  a bear,  and  out  of  his  throat  came 


90 


The  Pilgrim's  Pro<^ress. 

o o 


fire  and  smoke,  and  his  mouth  was  as  the 
mouth  of  the  king  of  beasts.  When  he  came 
up  to  Christian  he  gave  him  a look  of  scorn, 
and  thus  sought  to  sift  him. 

Apol. — “ Whence  came  you  ? and  to  what 
place  are  you  bound  ?” 

Chr. — “ I am  come  from  the  City  of 
Destruction,  which  is  the  place  of  all  ill,  and 
am  on  my  way  to  Mount  Zion.” 

Apol. — “ By  this  I know  thou  art  one  of 
my  serfs  ; for  all  that  land  is  mine,  and  I am 
the  prince  and  god  of  it.  How  is  it,  then,  that 
thou  hast  run  off  from  thy  king?  Were  it  not 
that  I hope  thou  wilt  serve  me  yet  more,  I 
would  strike  thee  now  at  one  blow  to  the 
ground.” 

Chr. — “ I was  born,  in  sooth,  in  your 
realm,  but  to  serve  thee  was  hard,  and  your 
pay  such  as  a man  could  not  live  on  ; ‘ for  the 
meed  of  sin  is  death  for  this  cause,  when  I 
was  come  to  years,  I did,  as  some  who  think 
do,  look  out  if  so  be  I might  mend  my 
state.” 

Apol. — “ d'here  is  no  prince  that  will 
brook  thus  to  lose  his  serfs ; nor  will  I as 


A poll)  on. 


91 


yet  lose  thee  : but  since  thou  dost  not  like 
thy  thrall  or  pay,  set  thy  mind  to  go  back  : 
what  our  realm  will  yield,  I do  here  pledge 
my  word  to  give  thee.” 

Chr. — “ But  I have  let  my  help  to  some 
one  else ; and  to  no  less  than  the  King  of 
Kings  : and  how  can  I,  as  a fair  act,  go  back 
with  thee  ?” 

Apol. — “ Thou  hast  done  in  this,  as  the 
trite  phrase  has  it,  change  a bad  for  a worse: 
but  it  is  the  way  with  those  who  vaunt  that 
they  serve  him,  in  a while  to  give  him  the 
slip,  and  come  back  once  more  to  me.  Do 
thou  so  too,  and  all  shall  be  well.” 

Chr. — “ But  I gave  him  my  faith,  and  am 
sworn  to  serve  him  as  my  true  liege  : how 
then  can  I go  back  from  this  and  not  be 
hung  like  one  who  breaks  his  pack  with 
the  state  ?” 

Apol. — “ Thou  didst  the  same  to  me,  and 
yet  I fain  would  pass  by  all,  if  now  thou  wilt 
yet  turn  once  more  and  go  back.” 

Chr. — “ What  I said  I would  give  thee 
was  in  my  young  years  : and  I count  that  the 
Prince  by  whose  flag  now  I stand  can  free  me 


92 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


from  my  vow ; yea,  and  from  all  things  else 
in  which  I did  yield  to  thee  : and,  yet  more, 
O thou  fell  Apollyon,  to  speak  truth,  I like 
his  yoke,  his  pay,  his  friends,  his  laws  and 
rule;  him  and  his  realm  more  than  thine; 
and  so  leave  off  to  strive  with  me.  I serve, 
and  will  go  with,  him.” 

Apol. — “ Think  yet,  when  thou  art  in  cool 
blood,  what  thou  art  like  to  meet  with  in  the 
way  that  thou  dost  go.  Thou  art  not  blind 
that  for  the  most  part  those  who  serve  him 
come  to  an  ill  end,  for  that  they  spurn  my 
laws  and  walk  not  in  my  paths.  What  a host 
of  them  have  been  put  to  deaths  of  shame ! 
And  still  thou  dost  count  that  to  serve  him  is 
best ; when,  in  sooth,  he  has  not  yet  come 
from  the  place  where  he  is,  to  save  one  that 
stood  by  his  cause,  out  of  my  hands : but,  as 
for  me,  how  oft,  as  all  the  world  well  knows, 
have  I not  set  free,  by  might  or  fraud,  those 
that  have  done  well  my  work,  from  him  and 
his,  when  in  their  hands;  and  so  I will 
save  thee.” 

CiiR. — “ lie  does  not  seek  so  soon  to  save 
them,  so  as  to  try  their  love,  and  find  if  they 


Apollyon, 


93 


will  cleave  to  him  to  the  end  : and  as  for  the 
ill  end  thou  dost  say  they  come  to,  that  tells 
for  their  good  ; for  to  be  set  free  now  they  do 
not  much  look  for  it  ; for  they  stay  for  their 
meed  ; and  they  shall  have  it  when  their  Prince 
comes  in  the  might  of  the  bright  hosts  that 
wait  on  him.” 

Apol. — “ Thou  hast  erst  been  false  in  thy 
turns  to  serve  him  ; and  how  dost  thou  think 
to  get  pay  of  him?” 

Chr. — “ In  what,  O Apollyon,  have  I been 
false  to  him  ?” 

Apol. — “ Thou  didst  faint  at  first  when 
thou  set  out,  when  thou  didst  all  but  drown 
in  the  Slough  of  Despond  : thou  didst  try 
wrong  ways  to  be  rid  of  thy  load,  when  thou 
wert  bound  to  stay  till  thy  Prince  took  it  off : 
thou  didst  sin  by  sleep,  and  lose  thy  choice 
roll ; thou  wast,  too,  fain  to  go  back  at  the 
sight  of  the  wild  beasts  ; and,  when  thou  dost 
talk  of  the  way  thou  hast  to  go,  and  of  what 
thou  hast  heard  and  seen,  thou  in  thy  heart 
crave  vain  praise  in  all  that  thou  dost  say 
and  do.” 

Chr. — “ All  this  is  true,  and  much  more 


94 


The  Pilgrim  s Progress. 


which  thou  hast  left  out : but  the  Prince 
whom  I serve  and  love  is  sure  to  show  ruth. 
But,  let  me  say,  these  faults  held  hold  of  me 
in  thy  land  ; for  there  I did  suck  them  in,  and 
they  have  made  me  groan  and  grieve  for 
them  ; whence  I have  got  the  grace  of  my 
Prince.” 

Then  Apollyon  broke  out  in  a sour  rage, 
and  said,  “ I am  a foe  to  this  Prince  : I hate 
him,  his  laws,  and  they  who  serve  him.  I 
am  come  out  with  the  view  to  make  thee 
yield.” 

Chr. — “Apollyon,  take  heed  what  you  do; 
for  I am  on  the  King’s  high  road,  the  way  of 
grace  ; for  which  cause  mind  how  you  act.” 

Then  Apollyon  spread  out  his  legs  the 
whole  breadth  of  the  way,  and  said,  “ I am 
void  of  fear  in  this  case : make  sure  thou 
shalt  die,  for  I swear  by  my  den  of  hell 
that  thou  shalt  not  go  hence : here  will  I 
spill  thy  soul.” 

And  with  that  he  threw  a dart,  all  flame, 
at  his  breast ; but  Christian  had  a shield  in 
his  hand,  with  which  he  caught  it,  and  so  did 
ward  off  the  risk  of  that. 


Apollyon>  95 

Then  did  Christian  draw;  for  he  saw  it 
was  time  for  him  to  stir ; and  Apollyon  as  fast 
made  at  him,  and  threw  darts  as  thick  as  hail, 
by  the  which,  in  spite  of  all  that  Christian 
could  do  to  shift  it,  Apollyon  hit  him  in  his 
head,  his  hand,  and  foot.  This  made  Christian 
give  some  back : Apollyon  then  went  to  his 
work  with  heart,  and  Christian  once  more  took 
heart,  and  met  his  foe  as  well  as  he  could. 
This  sore  fray  held  up  for  nigh  half  a day, 
till  Christian  was  just  quite  spent : for  you 
must  know  that  Christian,  from  his  wounds, 
must  needs  grow  more  and  more  weak. 

Then  Apollyon,  as  he  saw  his  time  had 
come,  made  up  close  to  Christian,  and  as  he 
strove  to  throw  him  gave  him  a dread  fall ; 
and  with  that  Christian’s  sword  flew  out  of 
his  hand.  Then  said  Apollyon,  " I am  sure 
of  thee  now!”  and  with  that  he  did  nigh 
press  him  to  death ; so  that  Christian  had 
slight  hope  of  life.  But,  as  God  would  have 
it,  while  Apollyon  dealt  his  last  blow,  by 
that  means  to  make  a full  end  of  this  good 
man,  Christian  at  once  put  out  his  hand  for 
his  sword,  caught  it,  and  said,  “ When  I fall 


96 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


I shall  then  rise;”  and  with  that  gave  him  a 
fierce  thrust,  which  made  him  give  back  as 
one  that  had  got  his  death  wound.  Christian 
saw  that,  and  made  at  him  once  more,  while 
he  said,  “ Nay,  in  all  these  things  we  more 
than  gain  the  prize  through  him  that  loves 
us  and  with  that  Apollyon  spread  forth  his 
foul  wings  and  sped  him  off,  that  Christian 
saw  no  more  of  him. 

In  this  fray  no  man  can  think,  save  he  had 
seen  and  heard,  as  I did,  what  yells  and  fell 
roars  Apollyon  made  all  the  time  of  the  fight : 
and  on  the  next  side,  what  sighs  and  groans 
burst  from  Christian’s  heart.  I did  not  see 
him  all  the  while  give  so  much  as  one  bland 
look,  till  he  found  he  had  smote  Apollyon 
with  his  sword:  then,  in  troth,  he  did  smile 
and  look  up ! but  it  was  the  most  dread  sight 
I have  seen  in  my  life. 

So  when  the  fight  came  to  a close, 
(Christian  said,  “ I will  here  give  thanks  to  him 
that  hath  kejrt  me  out  of  the  mouth  of  the 
chief  of  beasts,  to  him  that  did  help  me  in 
the  stiifc  With  Apollyon.”  And  so  he  did, 
and  said  the  while — 


ApoUyon. 


97 


Great  Prince  of  Imps,  the  proud  chief  of  this  fiend, 

Sought  my  great  harm  : and  hence  to  this  fell  end 
He  with  fit  gear  set  out : and  with  hot  breath 
That  told  of  hell,  did  fight  me  to  the  death, 

But  that  blest  Michael  gave  me  help,  and  I 
By  dint  of  sword  did  full  fast  make  him  fly : 

Hence  to  him  let  me  cease  not  to  give  praise, 

And  thank  and  bless  His  sweet  name  all  my  days.” 

Then  there  came  to  him  a hand  with  some 
of  the  leaves  of  the  “tree  of  life,”  the  which 
Christian  took  and  laid  them  on  the  wounds 
that  he  had  got  in  the  strife,  and  was  made 
whole  at  once.  He  then  sat  down  in  that 
place  to  eat  bread,  and  to  drink  of  that  flask 
that  he  had  got  a short  time  since  ; so  when 
he  felt  fresh  he  sped  him  on  his  way,  with  his 
sword  drawn  in  his  hand  : for  he  said,  “ I 
know  not  but  some  foe  may  be  at  hand.” 
But  from  thence  he  met  not  face  to  face  with 
Apollyon  quite  through  this  vale. 


CHAPTER  X. 


THE  VALLEY  OF  THE  SHADOW  OF  DEATH. 

OW  at  the  end  of  this  vale  was  one 
more,  known  as  the  Vale  of  the 
Shade  of  Death,  and  Christian  must 
needs  go  through  it,  for  this  cause,  that  the 
way  to  the  Celestial  City  lay  through  the 
midst  of  it.  Now  this  vale  is  quite  a lone 
place.  The  seer  Jeremiah  thus  paints  it : “A 
wild  ; a land  of  waste,  and  of  pits  ; a land  of 
drought,  and  of  the  shade  of  death  ; a land 
that  no  man  (but  he  that  walks  in  the  steps 
of  Christ)  can  pass  through,  and  where  no 
man  dwelt.” 

Now  here  Christian  was  worse  put  to  it 
than  in  his  fight  with  Apollyon ; as  by  the 
end  you  shall  see. 

I saw  then  in  my  dream,  that,  when 
Christian  was  got  to  the  edge  cf  the  Vale 
of  Death,  there  met  him  two  men,  sons  of 
them  that  brought  up  bad  news  of  the  good 


The  Valley  of  the  Shadow  of  Death. 


99 


land,  who  made  haste  to  go  back  : to  whom 
Christian  spake  in  this  wise  : 

“ To  w'hat  place  dost  thou  go?” 

“They  said,  “Back!  back!  and  we 
would  have  you  to  do  so,  too,  if  you  prize  life 
or  peace.” 

“ Why  ? what’s  the  cause  ?”  said  Chris- 
tian. 

“ Cause  I”  said  they  ; “we  were  bent  that 
way  as  you  now  go,  and  went  as  far  as  we 
durst ; and,  in  sooth,  it  was  a small  chance 
that  we  had  got  back,  for  had  we  gone  but  a 
few  steps  more  we  had  not  been  here  to  bring 
the  news  to  thee.” 

“But  what  have  you  met  with?”  said 
Christian. 

Men. — “ Why,  we  were  nigh  in  the  Vale 
of  the  Shade  of  Death  ; but  that  by  good  hap 
we  cast  our  eyes  in  front  of  us,  and  saw  the 
risk  ere  we  came  to  it.” 

“ But  what  have  you  seen  ?”  said  Chris- 
tian. 

Men. — “ Seen  I why,  the  vale,  in  sooth 
which  is  as  dark  as  pitch  : we  saw  there 
sprites,  imps,  and  snakes  of  the  pit : we 


lOO 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


heard,  in  like  way,  in  that  vale  howls  and 
yells  that  did  not  cease,  as  of  those  who  felt 
fierce  pain,  who  there  sat  bound  in  woe  and 
chains  ; and  high  at  the  top  of  the  vale  hang 
black  clouds  that  rush  to  and  fro  and  shut 
out  hope.  Death,  too,  at  all  times  shades  it 
with  his  spread  wings.  In  a word,  it  is 
most  dread,  as  no  law  reigns  there.” 

“ Then  said  Christian,  “ I see  not  yet,  by 
what  you  have  said,  but  that  this  is  my  way 
to  the  port  I seek.” 

Men. — “ Be  it  thy  way ; we  will  not 
choose  it  for  ours.” 

So  they  did  part : and  Christian  went  on 
his  way,  but  still  with  his  sword  drawn  in  his 
hand,  for  fear  lest  he  should  come  up  with 
a foe. 

I saw  then  in  my  dream,  so  far  as  the 
bounds  of  the  vale,  there  was  on  the  right 
hand  a most  deep  ditch  ; that  ditch  is  it  to 
which  the  blind  have  led  the  blind  in  each 
age,  and  have  both  there  lost  their  lives. 

Once  more,  lo,  on  the  left  hand  there 
was  a fell  (juag,  in  the  which,  strange  to  say, 
if  a good  man  falls  he  finds  no  ground  for  his 


The  Valley  of  the  Shadow  of  Death.  loi 


foot  to  stand  on.  In  this  sort  of  quag  King 
David  once  fell,  and  had  no  doubt  been  lost 
in  it,  did  not  He  that  has  the  might  pluck 
him  out. 

The  path  was  here  quite  strait,  and  hence 
good  Christian  was  the  more  put  to  it ; for 
when  he  sought  in  the  dark  to  shun  the  ditch 
on  the  one  hand,  he  was  prone  to  tip  on  one 
side  souse  in  the  mire  on  the  next.  More 
than  this,  when  he  sought  to  scape  the  mire, 
he  had  to  take  great  care  that  he  did  not 
sprawl  in  the  ditch. 

Thus  he  went  on,  and  I heard  him  there 
heave  sad  sighs  ; for  the  pass  was  here  so 
dark  that  oft  when  he  lift  up  his  foot  to  set 
forth  he  knew  not  where,  nor  on  what,  he 
should  set  it  next. 

Nigh  the  midst  of  the  vale  I saw  the 
mouth  of  hell  to  be,  and  it  stood,  too,  hard 
by  the  side  of  the  way.  “ Now,”  thought 
Christian,  “ what  shall  I do?”  And  at  times 
the  flame  and  smoke  would  come  out  so 
thick  and  with  such  force,  with  sparks  and 
dread  sounds  (things  that  did  not  care  for 
Christian  s sword,  as  did  Apollyon  ere  then). 


102 


The  Pilgrinis  Progress. 

that  he  had  to  put  up  his  sword  and  seize 
more  fit  arms,  known  as  All-prayer;  so  I 
heard  him  cry,  “ O Lord,  I pray  thee  save  my 
soul !” 

Thus  he  went  on  a great  while;  yet  still 
the  flames  would  reach  fast  to  him.  In  like 
way  he  heard  dole  sounds,  and  of  things  that 
did  rush  to  and  fro,  so  that  at  times  he 
thought  he  should  be  torn  to  shreds,  or  trod 
down  like  the  mire  in  the  streets. 

This  dread  sight  was  seen,  and  these  dire 
sounds  were  heard,  by  him  for  miles:  and  as 
he  came  to  a place  where  he  thought  he  heard 
a band  of  fiends  come  forth  to  meet  him,  he 
stopt,  and  did  muse  what  he  had  best  to  do. 
At  times  he  had  half  a thought  to  go  back ; 
then  he  thought  he  might  be  half  way 
through  the  vale.  He  brought  to  mind,  too, 
how  he  had  of  late  held  his  foes  at  bay,  and 
that  the  risk  to  go  back  might  be  much  more 
than  to  go  on.  So  he  made  up  his  mind  to 
go  on  : yet  the  fiends  did  seem  to  come  near 
and  more  near.  But  when  they  were  come 
just  up  at  him  he  did  cry  with  a loud  voice, 
“ I will  walk  in  the  strength  of  the  Lord 


The  Valley  of  the  Shadow  of  Death.  103 


God : ” so  they  gave  back,  and  came  on  no 
more. 

One  thing  I would  not  let  slip  : I took 
note  that  now  poor  Christian  was  in  such  a 
maze  that  he  did  not  know  his  own  voice. 
And  thus  I saw  it : just  when  he  was  come 
nigh  to  the  mouth  of  the  hot  pit  one  of  the  vile 
ones  got  to  the  back  of  him,  and  in  a low, 
soft  voice  did  breathe  foul  thoughts  in  his 
ear,  which  he,  in  sooth,  thought  had  come 
from  his  own  mind.  This  put  Christian  more 
to  it  than  aught  else  he  had  met  with,  just  to 
think  that  he- should  now  treat  with  scorn 
Him  he  erst  did  love  so  much.  Yet,  could  he 
but  help  it,  he  would  not  have  done  it ; but 
he  had  not  the  skill  for  to  stop  his  ears,  or  to 
know  from  whence  those  foul  thoughts  came. 

When  Christian  had  trod  on  in  this  lorn 
state  some  length  of  time,  he  thought  he 
heard  the  voice  of  a man,  as  if  in  front  of 
him,  say  thus  ; “ Though  I walk  through  the 
vale  of  the  shade  of  death  I will  fear  no  ill: 
for  Thou  art  with  me.” 

Then  was  he  glad,  and  that  for  three 
things  : first,  for  that  he  learnt  from  thence 


104 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


that  some  who  fear  God  were  in  this  vale  as 
well  as  he  ; next,  for  that  he  knew  God  was 
with  them,  though  in  that  dark  and  dire 
state  : “ and  why  not,”  thought  he,  “ with  me 
though  by  cause  of  the  lets  that  are  found  in 
this  place,  I fail  to  see  it?”  and  thrice,  that 
he  had  hope  (could  he  come  up  to  them)  to 
have  friends  by  and  by.  So  he  went  on,  and 
did  call  to  him  that  was  in  front : but  he 
knew  not  what  to  say,  for  that  he,  too, 
thought  he  had  none  nigh  him.  And  by  and 
by  the  day  broke.  Then  said  Christian, 
“ He  doth  turn  the  shade  of  death  to  morn.” 

Now  as  morn  had  come,  he  gave  a look 
back,  not  of  wish  to  turn  his  steps,  but  to  see 
by  the  light  of  the  day  what  risks  he  had 
gone  through  in  the  dark.  So  he  had  a more 
clear  view  of  the  ditch  that  was  on  the  one 
hand,  and  the  quag  that  was  on  the  next ; in 
like  way  he  saw  how  strait  the  way  was 
which  lay  twixt  them  both.  More  than  this, 
now  he  saw  the  sprites,  imps,  and  foul 
snakes  of  the  pit,  but  all  a long  way  off,  for 
soon  as  the  day  broke  they  came  not  nigh : 
yet  they  were  shown  to  him,  in  proof  of 


The  Valley  of  the  Shadow  of  Death.  105 


that  which  is  writ,  “ He  makes  known  deep 
things  out  of  the  dark,  and  brings  out  to 
light  the  shade  of  death.” 

Now  did  Christian  feel  with  full  force  how 
he  had  got  safe  from  all  the  risks  of  his  lone 
way:  which  risks,  though  he  did  not  so  much 
fear  them  as  of  old,  yet  he  saw  them  best 
now  ; for  that  the  light  of  the  day  made  them 
stand  out  in  bold  form  to  him.  And  just  at 
this  time  the  sun  rose ; and  this  was  one  more 
boon  to  Christian : for  you  must  note,  that, 
though  the  first  part  of  the  Vale  of  the  Shade 
of  Death  was  rife  with  risks,  yet  this  next  part 
was,  if  so  be,  far  more  so  : for,  from  the  place 
where  he  now  stood  as  far  as  to  the  end  of  the 
vale,  the  way  was  all  through  set  so  full  of 
snares,  traps,  gins,  and  nets,  here ; and  so  full 
of  pits,  falls,  deep  holes,  and  slopes,  down 
there  ; that  had  it  now  been  dark,  as  it  was 
when  he  came  the  first  part  of  the  way,  had  he 
had  five  times  ten  score  souls,  they  had  for 
this  cause  been  cast  off.  But,  as  I said  just 
now,  the  sun  did  rise.  Then  said  he,  “ His 
torch  shines  on  my  head ; and  by  his  light  I 
go  through  the  dark.” 


io6  The  Pilgrims  Progress. 

In  this  light  hence  he  came  to  the  end  of 
the  vale. 

Now  I saw  in  my  dream,  that  at  the  end 
of  this  vale  lay  blood,  bones,  dust,  and  sere 
trunks  of  men  that  had  gone  this  way  of  yore  ; 
and  while  I dwelt  on  what  should  be  the 
cause,  I saw  not  far  from  me  a cave,  where 
two  huge  men.  Pope  and  Pagan  dwelt  in  old 
time  ; by  whose  might  and  fell  force  the  men 
whose  bones,  blood,  dust,  and  so  forth,  lay 
there,  were  put  to  death,  in  the  worst  form. 
By  this  place  Christian  went  void  of  much 
risk,  which  I thought  strange  ; but  I have 
learnt  since  that  Pagan  has  been  dead  this 
long  while;  and  as  for  the  next,  though  he  yet 
lives,  he  is,  through  age  and  each  shrewd 
brush  he  met  in  his  young  days,  grown  so 
weak  and^stiff  in  his  joints,  that  he  can  now 
do  scarce  else  than  sit  in  the  mouth  of  his 
cave,  grin  at  folk  as  they  go  by,  and  bite 
his  nails  for  that  he  fails  to  come  at  them. 

So  I saw  that  Christian  went  on  his  way  : 
yet  at  the  sight  of  the  old  man  that  sat  in  the 
mouth  of  the  cave,  he  could  not  tell  what  to 
think  ; the  more  so,  for  that  he  spake  to  him. 


The  Valley  of  the  Shadow  of  Death.  107 


though  he  could  not  go  in  his  wake,  and  said, 
“You  will  not  mend  till  more  of  you  be 
burnt.”  But  he  held  his  peace,  and  set  a 
good  face  on  it,  and  so  went  by  and  caught 
hurt.  Then  sang  Christian — 

“ Oh,  most  strange  of  worlds  ! (I  can  say  no  less) 

That  I should  get  safe  through  in  those  dire  haps 
That  I have  met  with  here ! Oh,  most  blest  be 
The  hand  that  hath  from  this  quite  set  me  clear ! 

Dread  risks  in  dark,  as  foul  fiends,  hell,  and  sin, 

Did  hem  me  round,  while  I was  in  this  vale : 

Yea,  snares,  and  pits,  and  traps,  and  nets  did  lie 
My  path  to  right  and  left,  that  I,  dull  dolt, 

Might  have  been  caught,  fixt  in  a snare,  cast  down 
But  since  I live,  let  Christ  now  wear  the  crown/** 


xoS 


CHArTER  XL 

CHRISTIAN  AND  FAITHFUL. 

OW  as  Christian  went  on  his  way  he 
came  to  a small  height,  which  was  cast 
up  so  that  those  who  came  that  way 
might  see  in  front  of  them.  Up  there,  then, 
Christian  went  : and,  with  a glance,  saw 
Faithful  some  way  on  the  road.  Then  said 
Christian  in  a loud  voice,  “ Ho,  ho!  so  ho! 
stay,  and  I will  go  on  with  you.”  At  that 
Faithful  gave  a look  back  ; to  whom  Christian 
did  once  more  cry,  “ Stay,  stay,  till  I come  up 
to  you.”  But  Faithful  said,  “ No,  it  is  as 
much  as  my  life  is  worth  ; and  he  who  doth 
venge  blood  is  in  my  wake.” 

At  this  Christian  set  out  with  all  his 
strength,  and  soon  got  up  with  Faithful, 
and  did,  in  sooth,  leave  him  lag,  so  that  the 
last  was  first.  Then  did  Christian  wear  a 
proud  smile,  for  that  he  had  got  the  start  of 
his  friend  : but  as  he  did  not  take  good  heed 
to  his  feet,  he  soon  struck  some  tuft  and  fell. 


Christian  and  Faithful. 


109 

and  could  not  rise  till  Faithful  came  up  to 
help  him. 

Then  I saw  in  my  dream,  they  went  on 
with  good  will  side  by  side,  and  had  sweet 
talk  of  all  things  that  they  had  met  with  on 
their  way  : and  thus  Christian  first  spoke  : 

“ My  most  dear  friend  Faithful,  I am 
glad  I have  come  up  with  you ; and  that 
God  hath  so  made  us  of  one  mind  that 
we  can  walk  as  friends  in  this  so  fair  a 
path.” 

Fai. — “ I had  thought,  dear  friend,  to  have 
had  you  with  me  quite  from  our  town,  but 
you  did  get  the  start  of  me  : hence  I had  to 
come  thus  much  of  the  way  lone,  as  you  see.” 

Chr. — “ How  long  did  you  stay  in  the 
City  of  Destruction,  ere  you  set  out  in  search 
of  me  on  your  way  ?” 

Fai. — “ Till  I could  not  stay  back : for 
there  was  great  talk  when  you  were  gone  out, 
that  our  town  would  in  a short  time  with 
fire  from  the  clouds  be  burnt  down  to  the 
ground.” 

Chr. — “ What  I did  the  folk  of  your  place 
talk  so?” 


i t O The  Pilgrim  s Progress. 

Fai. — “ Yes,  it  was  for  a while  in  the 
mouth  of  each  one.” 

Chr. — “ What ! and  did  no  more  of  them 
but  you  come  out  to  scape  the  doom  ?” 

Fai. — “ Though  there  was,  as  I said,  a 
great  talk  of  that,  yet  I do  not  think  they  put 
firm  faith  in  it.  For,  in  the  heat  of  the  talk^ 
I heard  some  of  them  jeer  at  you,  and  at  the 
rash  route  on  which  you  set  out.  But  I did 
think,  and  do  still,  that  the  end  of  your  town 
will  be  with  fire  from  the  sky  ; and  for  this 
cause  I have  fled  from  it.” 

Chr. — “ Did  you  hear  no  talk  of  friend 
Pliable  ?” 

Fai. — “ Yes,  Christian,  I heard  that  he 
went  in  your  track  till  he  came  at  the  Slough 
of  Despond  ; where,  as  some  said,  he  fell  in  ; 
but  he  would  not  be  known  to  have  so  done  ; 
but  I am  sure  he  was  all  grime  with  that  kind 
of  dirt.” 

Chr. — “ And  what  said  the  folk  to  him  ?” 

Fai. — “ He  hath,  since  he  went  back,  met 
with  taunts  and  jeers,  and  that  from  all  sorts 
of  men  ; some  do  mock  and  fleer  at  him,  and 
scarce  will  one  set  him  on  work.  He  is  now 


Christian  and  Faithful. 


r 1 1 


five  times  worse  than  if  he  had  not  gone  out 
of  the  town.” 

Chr. — “ But  why  should  they  be  so  set  on 
him,  since  they,  too,  loathe  the  way  that  he 
left  ?” 

Fai. — “Oh  ! they  say,  ‘ Hang  him  ; he  turns 
his  coat ! he  was  not  true  to  what  he  took  up  !’ 
I think  God  doth  stir  up  his  foes  to  hiss  at 
him,  and  make  him  a thing  of  scorn,  for  that 
he  hath  left  the  way.” 

Chr. — “ Had  you  no  talk  with  him  ere  you 
came  out  ?” 

Fai. — “ I met  him  once  in  the  streets,  but 
he  did  leer  off  on  the  next  side,  as  one  who 
felt  shame  for  what  he  had  done.” 

Chr. — Well,  as  I first  set  out,  I had  hopes 
of  that  man ; but  now  I fear  he  will  fall  in 
the  wrack  of  the  town.” 

Fai. — “ They  are  my  fears  of  him  too  • 
but  who  can  stay  that  wh'ch  will  be?” 

“ Well,  friend  Faithful,’'  said  Christian, 
“ let  us  leave  him,  and  talk  of  things  with 
which  we  have  got  more  to  do.  Tell  me  now 
what  you  have  met  with  in  the  way  as  you 
came  ; for  I know  you  have  met  with  some 


II2 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


things,  or  else  it  may  be  writ  for  a strange 
pass.” 

Fai. — “ I got  clear  of  the  slough  that  I 
see  you  fell  in,  and  came  up  to  the  gate  free 
from  that  risk  : but  I met  with  one  whose  name 
was  Wanton,  that  had  like  to  have  done  me 
a hurt.” 

Chr. — “ It  was  well  you  got  free  from  her 
net : Joseph  was  hard  put  to  it  by  her,  and  he 
got  free  as  you  did  ; but  it  had  like  to  have 
cost  him  his  life.  But  what  did  she  do  to 
you  ? 

Fai. — “ You  durst  not  think  but  that  you 
know  in  some  wise  what  a glib  tongue  she 
had  : she  lay  at  me  hard  to  turn  with  her  : 
and  said  I should  find  peace  in  her  paths.” 

Chr. — “ Nay,  she  did  not  pledge  to  you 
that  your  soul  should  find  peace  ?” 

Fai. — “ You  know  what  I mean  : all  joy 
of  sense.” 

Chr. — “ Thank  God  you  have  got  out  of 
her  reach  : ‘ Those  whom  the  Lord  loathes 
shall  fall  in  her  ditch.’” 

Fai. — “ Nay,  I know  not  that  I did  quite 
scape  her  or  no.” 


Christian  and  Faithful.  113 

Chr. — “ Why,  I trow  you  did  not  yield, 
as  she  sought  of  thee?” 

Fai. — “ No,  not  to  soil  my  soul  : for  I 
thought  of  a phrase  in  an  old  book  I had 
seen,  which  saith,  ‘ Her  steps  take  hold  on 
hell.’  So  I shut  my  eyes  lest  her  looks 
should  sway  me  : then  she  did  rail  on  me,  and 
I went  my  way.” 

Chr. — “Did  you  meet  with  no  more  risk 
as  you  came  ?” 

Fai. — “When  I came  to  the  foot  of  the 
hill  known  as  Difficulty,  I met  with  a hoar 
old  man,  who  would  know  what  I was,  and  to 
what  place  I was  bound  ? I told  him  I was  a 
wight  on  my  way  to  the  Celestial  City.  Then 
said  the  old  man,  ‘Thou  dost  look  like  a frank 
soul  ; wilt  thou  stay  and  dwell  with  me  for 
the  pay  that  I shall  give  thee?’  Then  I did 
ask  his  name,  and  where  he  dwelt  ? He  said, 
‘ His  name  was  Adam  the  First,  and  he  dwelt 
in  the  Town  of  Deceit.’  Then  I sought  to 
know  what  was  his  work  ? and  what  the  pay 
that  he  would  give?  He  told  me,  ‘That  his 
work  was  fraught  with  joys,  and  his  pay,  that 
I should  be  his  heir  at  last.’  I then  would 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


114 


know  still  more,  what  house  he  kept,  and  who 
did  serve  him  ? So  he  told  me,  ‘ That  his 
house  was  kept  up  with  all  the  nice  things  in 
the  world  ; and  that  those  who  did  his  work 
were  of  his  own  blood.’  Then  I would  know 
what  kin  he  had  ? He  said,  ‘ He  had  but 
three  maids,  “ the  Lust  of  the  flesh,  the  Lust 
of  the  eyes,  and  the  Pride  of  life,”  and  that  I 
should  wive  with  one  of  them,  if  I would.’ 
Then  I did  ask,  how  long  time  he  would  have 
me  to  live  with  him?  And  he  told  me,  ‘As 
long  as  he  had  life.’  ” 

Chr. — “ Well,  and  what  close  came  the 
old  man  and  you  to  at  last  ?” 

Fai. — “ Why,  at  first  I would  lief  go  with 
the  man,  for  I thought  he  spake  full  fair  ; but 
when  I gave  a look  in  his  brow,  as  I spoke 
with  him,  I saw  there  writ,  “ Put  off  the  old 
man  with  his  deeds.” 

CiiR. — “ And  how  then  ?” 

Fai. — “ Then  it  came  red  hot  to  my  mind, 
that  spite  of  all  he  said,  and  his  smooth  ways, 
when  he  got  me  home  to  his  house  he  would 
sell  me  for  a slave.  So  I bid  him  cease  to 
talk,  for  I would  not  come  near  the  door  of 


Christian  and  Faithful.  1 1 5 

his  house.  Then  he  did  mock  me,  and  told 
me  that  he  would  send  such  a one  at  my  heels 
that  should  make  my  way  sharp  to  my  soul. 
So  I went  off  from  him  : but  just  as  I set 
round  to  go  thence,  I felt  him  take  hold  of 
my  flesh,  and  give  me  such  a dread  twitch 
back,  that  I thought  he  did  pull  part  of  me 
with  him.  This  made  me  cry,  ‘ O wretch 
of  a man  1 ’ — So  I went  on  my  way  up 
the  hill. 

“ Now,  when  I had  got  nigh  half  way  up,  I 
gave  a look  back,  and  saw  one  move  on  in 
my  steps,  swift  as  the  wind ; so  he  came  up 
with  me  just  by  the  place  where  the  bench 
stands.” 

“ Just  there,”  said  Christian,  “ did  I sit 
down  to  rest  me  ; but  as  sleep  crept  on  me,  I 
there  lost  this  roll  out  of  my  breast.” 

Fai. — “ But,  good  friend,  hear  me  out ; 
so  soon  as  the  man  came  up  with  me,  it  was 
but  a word  and  a blow,  for  down  he  flung  me, 
and  laid  me  for  dead.  But,  when  I got  free 
from  the  shock,  I would  know  why  it  was  he 
dealt  with  me  so  ? He  said,  ‘ For  that  I did 
in  my  heart  cleave  to  Adam  the  First and 


I [6  TJu  Piln'ims  Pro<rress. 

o 

with  that  he  struck  me  one  more  fierce  blow 
on  the  breast,  and  beat  me  down  on  the  back  ; 
so  I lay  at  his  foot  as  dead,  as  at  first. 
.So  when  I came  to  once  more  I did  cry 
him  grace  ; but  he  said,  ‘ I know  not  how 
to  show  grace  and  with  that  he  struck  me 
down  the  third  time.  He  had,  no  doubt, 
made  an  end  of  me,  but  that  one  came  by 
and  bid  him  stay  his  hand.” 

CiiR. — “ Who  was  that  that  bid  him  stay 
his  hand?” 

Fyvi. — “ I did  not  know  him  at  first,  but 
as  he  went  by  I saw  the  holes  in  his  hands 
and  in  his  sides  : then  I felt  sure  that  he  was 
our  Lord.  So  I went  up  the  hill.” 

CiiR. — “ That  man  that  came  up  with  you 
was  Moses.  He  spares  not,  nor  knows  he 
how  to  show  grace  to  those  that  break  his 
law.” 

Fai. — “ I know  it  right  well ; it  is  not  the 
first  time  that  he  has  met  with  me.  It  was 
he  that  came  to  me  when  I dwelt  safe  at  home, 
and  that  told  me  he  would  l)urn  my  house  on 
my  head  if  I would  stay  there.” 

CiiR. — “But  did  you  not  see  the  house 


Christian  and  Faithfnl.  1 1 7 

that  stood  there  on  the  top  of  the  hill,  on  the 
side  of  which  Moses  met  you?” 

Fai. — “ Yes,  and  the  wild  beasts,  too,  ere 
I came  at  it : but,  for  the  wild  beasts,  I think 
they  slept ; for  it  was  close  on  noon  ; and  as 
I had  so  much  of  the  day  to  spend,  I came 
by  the  man  at  the  lodge,  and  then  down 
the  hill.” 

Chr. — “ Me  told  me,  in  sooth,  that  he  saw 
you  go  by ; but  I wish  you  had  gone  to 
the  house,  for  they  would  have  shown  you 
such  a lot  of  rare  things  that  you  would 
scarce  have  let  them  slip  your  mind  to 
the  day  of  your  death.  But,  pray  tell  me, 
did  you  meet  with  no  one  in  the  Vale  of 
Humility  ?” 

Fai. — “Yes,  I met  with  one  Discontent, 
who  would  fain  have  me  to  go  back  once  more 
with  him  : his  cause  was,  for  that  the  vale  did 
not  bear  a good  name.  He  told  me,  too,  that 
there  to  go  was  to  flout  all  my  friends, 
as  Pride,  Arrogancy,  Self-conceit,  Worldly- 
glory,  with  those,  who  he  knew,  as  he  said, 
would  feel  much  hurt  if  I was  .spch  a fool  as 
to  wade  through  this  val^/’ 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


I x8 


Chr. — “ Well,  and  how  did  you  speak 
him  ?” 

Fai. — “ I told  him  that,  though  all  these 
whose  names  he  spoke  of  might  claim  to  be 
my  kin,  and  that  is  no  more  than  right  (for, 
in  good  sooth,  they  were  my  kin  in  the  sense 
of  the  flesh) ; yet  since  I have  gone  in  the 
way  they  care  not  to  own  me,  as  I,  too,  have 
cast  them  off ; and  hence  they  are  now  no 
more  than  if  they  had  not  been  of  my  line. 
I told  him,  in  like  way,  that  as  to  this  vale 
he  hath  shown  the  thing  in  a false  light.” 

Chr. — “ Met  you  with  naught  else  in 
that  vale  ?” 

Fai. — “Yes,  I met  with  Shame:  but  of 
all  men  that  I met  with  in  my  way,  he,  I 
think,  bears  the  wrong  name.  The  one  would 
be  said  nay,  when  I had  a slight  talk  with  him, 
and  aught  else  ; but  this  bold  Shame  would 
have  done  not  at  all.” 

Chr. — “ Why,  what  did  he  say  to  you  ?” 

F'ai. — “ What ! Why  he  did  flout  at  faith, 
lie  said  it  was  a poor,  low,  mean  thing  for  a 
man  to  mind  faith  ; he  said  that  a soul  that 
shrinks  from  sin  is  not  fit  for  a man  ; and 


Christian  and  Faithful. 


119 


that  foi  a man  to  set  watch  on  his  words  and 
ways,  so  as  to  tie  him  up  from  that  free 
course  that  the  brave  souls  of  the  times  are 
wont  to  take,  would  make  him  the  butt  of  the 
times.  He  said,  too,  that  but  few  of  the 
great,  rich,  or  wise,  held  my  views ; nor  did 
those  till  they  were  led  to  be  fools,  and  to  be 
of  a free  mind  to  run  the  loss  of  all  for  none 
else  knows  what.  More  than  this,  he  said 
such  were  of  a base  and  low  caste,  and  knew 
naught  of  those  things  which  are  the  boast 
of  the  wise.  Yea,  he  did  hold  me  to  it  at 
that  rate,  too,  of  more  things  than  here  I 
tell ; as,  that  it  was  a shame  to  sit  and  whine 
and  moan  when  I heard  some  words  on  a 
text,  and  a shame  to  come  home  with  sighs 
and  groans ; that  it  was  a shame  to  ask  grace 
of  folk  for  slight  faults,  or  to  give  back  that 
which  I did  take.  He  said,  too,  that  faith 
made  a man  grow  strange  to  the  great,  for 
that  of  a vice  or  two  (to  which  he  gave  fine 
names);  and  made  him  own  and  prize  the 
base,  for  that  they  were  of  the  same  guild 
of  faith : ‘ and  is  not  this,’  said  he,  ‘ a 
shame  ?’  ” 


I 20 


The  Pilgrim  s Pro<>rciS. 

^ c> 


Chr. — “ And  what  did  you  say  to  him?” 

Fai. — “ Say  ! I could  not  tell  what  to  say 
at  first.  Yea,  he  put  me  so  to  it  that  my 
blood  came  up  in  my  face  ; aye,  this  Shame 
did  fetch  it  up,  and  had,  too,  beat  me  quite 
off.  But  at  last  I thought  that  that  which 
men  prize  was  base  in  the  sight  of  God. 
And  I thought,  once  more,  this  Shame  tells 
me  what  men  are : but  he  tells  me  naught 
what  God  or  the  Word  of  God  is.  And  I 
thought,  too,  that  at  the  day  of  doom  we 
shall  not  meet  with  death  or  life,  as  the  bold 
minds  of  the  world  would  list,  but  by  the 
wise  law  of  the  Most  High.  Hence,  thought 
I,  what  God  says  is  best,  is  best,  though  all 
the  men  in  the  world  are  foes  to  it.  As,  then, 
God  likes  his  faith  ; as  God  likes  a soul  that 
shrinks  from  sin  ; and  as  they  are  most  wise 
who  wear  the  guise  of  fools  to  gain  a crown  ; 
and  that  the  poor  man  that  loves  Christ  is 
more  rich  than  the  man  that  sways  a world,  that 
hates  him  ; Shame,  go  thy  way,  thou  art  a foe 
to  my  soul’s  weal  ; shall  I hold  with  thee  and 
thwart  the  will  of  my  liege  Lord?  how  then 
shall  I look  him  in  the  face  when  he  comes  ? 


Christian  and  Faithful. 


I 2 I 


Should  I now  feel  shame  in  his  ways,  and 
keep  clear  of  those  who  serve  him,  how  can 
I hope  for  him  to  bless  me? — But,  in  sooth, 
this  Shame  was  a bold  knave  ; I could  scarce 
shake  him  out  of  my  way;  yea,  he  would 
haunt  me,  and  cease  not  to  breathe  words  in 
mine  ear,  with  some  one  or  more  of  the  weak 
parts  of  faith  : but  at  last  I told  him  it  was 
l3ut  in  vain  to  strive  with  me  from  that  time 
forth  ; for  all  those  things  that  he  thought  of 
no  worth,  in  those  did  I take  most  pride;  and 
so,  at  last,  I got  past  this  bold  one,  that  did 
tease  me  so  much.  And  when  I shook  him 
off,  then  I sang — 

The  tests  that  those  men  meet,  with  all  men  else 
That  bow  their  wills  to  the  high  call  of  God, 

Are  great ; and  well,  I wist,  do  suit  the  flesh. 

And  come,  and  come,  and  come  e’en  yet  once  more  ; 

That  now,  or  some  time  else,  we  by  them  may 
Be  held  in  thrall,  flung  down,  and  cast  sheer  off : 

Oh,  let  those  in  the  way,  let  all  such,  then, 

Be  9>harp,  and  quick,  and  quit  them  like  true  men.” 

Chr. — “ I am  glad,  my  friend,  that  thou 
didst  strive  with  this  knave  in  so  brave  a 
way;  for  of  all,  as  thou  dost  say,  I think  he 
has  the  wrone  name ; for  he  is  so  bold  as  tq 


122 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


trace  our  steps  in  the  streets,  and  to  try  to  put 
us  to  shame  in  the  sight  of  all  men  ; that  is, 
to  make  us  feel  shame  in  that  which  is  good. 
But  if  he  was  not  bold  of  face,  he  would  not 
try  to  do  what  he  does  : but  let  us  still  strive 
to  foil  him  : for  in  spite  of  all  his  vain  boasts, 
he  doth  aid  the  fool  and  none  else ; for,  as  the 
Wise  Man  says,  ‘ Shame  shall  be  the  gain 
of  fools.’  ” 

Fai. — “ I think  we  must  cry  to  Him  for 
help  in  our  frays  with  Shame,  that  would 
have  us  ‘ Stand  up  for  truth  on  the  earth.’” 

Chr. — “ You  say  true  : but  did  you  meet 
none  else  in  that  vale  ?” 

Fai. — “ No,  not  I ; for  I had  the  sun  with 
me  all  the  rest  of  the  way  through  that,  as 
well  as  through  the  Vale  of  the  Shade  of 
Death.” 

Chr. — “ It  was  well  for  you  ; I am  sure  it 
did  fare  far  worse  with  me  : I had  for  a long 
time,  as  soon  as  I got  to  that  vale,  a dread 
broil  with  that  foul  fiend  Apollyon  ; yea,  I 
thought,  in  fine,  he  would  kill  me  ; the  more 
so  when  he  got  me  down,  and  did  crush  me 
with  his  weight,  as  if  he  would  fain  crush  me 


Christian  and  Faithful, 


to  bits  : for  as  he  threw  me,  my  sword  flew 
out  of  my  hand.  Nay,  he  told  me  he  was 
sure  of  me  : but  I did  ‘ cry  to  God,  and  he 
heard  me ; and  brought  me  out  of  all  my 
griefs.’  Then  I sped  down  the  Vale  of  the 
Shade  of  Death,  and  had  no  light  for  nigh 
half  the  way  through  it.  I thought  I should 
have  lost  my  life  there  more  than  once  ; but 
at  last  day  broke,  and  the  sun  rose,  and  I 
went  through  that  which  was  to  the  front  of 
me  with  far  more  ease  and  peace.” 


124 


CHAPTER  XII. 

TALKATIVE. 

HPRE  than  this,  I saw  in  my  dream, 

' that  as  they  went  on,  Faithful,  who 
1 by  chance  gav'e  a look  on  one  side, 
saw  a man  whose  name  is  Talkative,  walk 
some  way  off  by  the  side  of  them  : for  in  this 
place  there  was  full  room  for  them  all  to 
walk.  He  was  a tall  man,  and  did  look  best 
when  not  near  at  hand.  To  this  man  Faithful 
spoke  in  such  wise  : — 

“ Friend,  to  what  place  dost  thou  go?  dost 
thou  go  to  the  blest  land  ? ” 

Talk. — “ I am  bound  to  that  same  place.” 
Fai. — “ That  is  well  : then  I hope  we 
may  have  you  with  us;  it  will  be  such  a 
boon.” 

Talk. — “ With  a right  good  will,  will  I 
go  with  you.” 

F'ai. — “ Come  on  then,  and  let  us  go  side 
by  side,  and  let  us  spend  our  time  well,  by 
wise  speech  that  tends  to  use.” 


Talkative. 


12K 


Talk. — “ To  talk  of  things  that  are  good, 
I like  much,  with  you  or  with  some  one  else  : 
and  I am  glad  that  I have  met  with  those  who 
take  pride  in  so  good  a work.  For,  to  speak 
the  truth,  there  are  but  few  that  care  thus  to 
spend  their  time,  as  they  are  on  their  way  ; 
but  choose  much  more  to  speak  of  things  that 
are  vain  : and  this  hath  been  a grief  to  me.” 

Fai. — “That  is,  in  sooth,  a thing  to  mourn : 
for  what  thing  so  meet  for  the  use  of  the 
tongue  and  mouth  of  men  on  earth,  as  are 
the  things  of  the  great  God  on  high?’' 

Talk. — “ I like  you  right  well,  for  what 
you  say  is  full  of  force ; and,  I will  add,  what 
thing  doth  so  please  or  what  brings  such  a 
boon  as  to  talk  of  the  things  of  God  ? What 
thing  doth  so  please  ? that  is,  if  a man  hath 
joy  in  things  that  are  strange : such  as,  if  a 
man  doth  love  to  talk  of  the  first  cause  or  the 
laws  of  things  ; or  if  a man  doth  love  to  talk 
of  things  that  are  deep  or  out  of  course,  or 
signs  ; where  shall  he  find  things  set  down 
with  such  charm  and  grace,  and  writ  with  so 
sweet  a pen,  as  in  the  Word  of  God?” 

Fai. — “ That  is  true  ; but  to  gain  good  by 


such  things  in  our  talk,  should  be  that  which 
we  seek.” 

'I'alk. — “ That  is  it  that  I said;  for  to  talk 
of  such  things  is  of  great  use  ; for  by  this 
means  a man  may  get  to  know  a fair  share  of 
things  ; as  how  vain  are  the  things  of  earth  ; 
and  how  good  are  the  things  that  fail  not. 
Thus  as  a rule  ; but,  in  a strict  sense,  by  this 
a man  may  learn  the  need  of  the  new  birth  ; 
how  works  fail  to  save  ; the  need  of  Christ’s 
robes,  and  so  forth.  Then,  by  this,  a man 
may  learn  by  talk  what  it  is  to  mourn  for  sin, 
to  have  faith,  to  pray,  to  bear  grief,  or  the 
like.  By  this,  too,  a man  may  learn  what  it  is 
that  soothes,  and  what  are  the  high  hopes  set 
forth  in  the  Word  of  the  Grace  of  God  ; to 
his  own  peace.  In  like  way,  by  this  a man 
may  learn  to  fight  false  views,  to  be  stanch 
for  the  truth,  and  to  teach  those  who  know 
not  what  is  their  chief  good.” 

Fai. — “ All  this  is  true ; and  glad  I am  to 
hear  tiicse  tilings  from  you.” 

d'ALK. — “ Ah  ! the  want  of  this  is  the 
cause  that  so  few  know  the  need  of  faith  and 
the  need  of  a work  of  grace  in  their  soul  ; 


Talkative. 


127 


with  a view  to  the  life  that  lasts  ; but,  void  of 
thought,  live  in  the  works  of  the  law,  by  the 
♦ which  a man  can  by  no  means  gain  a place  in 
the  realm  of  the  Lord.” 

Fax. — “ But,  by  your  leave,  to  know  these 
things  in  the  right  way,  is  the  gift  of  God  ; 
no  man  can  reach  to  them  by  his  own  might, 
or  by  the  mere  talk  of  them.” 

Talk. — “ All  this  I know  quite  well : for 
a man  can  gain  naught  save  God  gives  it 
him  : all  is  of  grace,  not  of  works.  I could 
give  you  ten  score  texts  in  proof  of  this.” 

“ Well,  then,”  said  Faithful,  “ what  is  that 
one  thing  that  we  shall  at  this  time  found  our 
speech  on  ?” 

Talk. — “ What  you  will  : I will  talk  of 
things  not  of  earth,  or  of  things  of  earth  ; 
things  of  life,  or  things  of  grace;  things  pure, 
or  things  of  the  world ; things  far  off,  or 
things  at  home  ; things  of  great  weight,  and 
those  of  less  weight ; so  that  we  but  gain 
good  by  it.” 

Now  did  Faithful  think  this  strange ; so 
he  came  up  to  Christian  (for  he  did  not  walk 
with  them  all  this  while),  and  said  to  him  in  a 


128 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


soft  voice,  “ What  a brave  friend  have  we  got ! 
Of  a truth,  this  man  will  do  well  in  the  way.” 

At  this  Christian  gave  a meek  smile,  and 
said,  “ This  man  whom  you  so  take  to,  will 
cheat  with  this  tongue  of  his  a score  of  them 
that  know  him  not.” 

Fai. — “ Do  you  know  him  then  ?” 

CiiR. — “ Know  him  ! Yes  ; he  knows  not 
his  own  self  half  so  well.” 

Fai. — “ Pray  what  is  he  ?” 

Chr. — “ His  name  is  Talkative ; he  dwells 
in  our  town.  I wist  not  how  you  should  be 
strange  to  him  ; but  I know  that  our  town  is 
large.” 

Fai. — “ Whose  son  is  he  ? and  in  what 
part  doth  he  dwell  ?” 

Chr. — “ He  is  the  son  of  one  Say-well : 
he  dwelt  in  Prating-row;  and  he  is  known  of 
all  that  live  near  him  by  the  name  of  Talka- 
tive in  Prating-row;  and  in  spite  of  his 
fine  tongue  he  is  but  a most  vile  wretch.” 

Fai. — “ Well,  he  seems  to  be  a man  of 
good  looks.” 

Chr. — “ That  is,  to  them  that  know  him 
not  through  and  through  : for  he  is  best  out  of 


Talkative. 


129 


doors ; near  home  his  looks  are  as  bad  as  you 
could  find.  What  you  say  as  to  his  good 
looks,  brings  to  my  mind  what  I have  seen  in 
the  work  of  one  whose  prints  show  best  when 
a long  way  off,  but  more  near,  not  so  well.” 

Fai. — “ But  I fain  think  you  do  but  jest, 
as  I saw  you  smile.” 

Chr. — “ God  grant  not  that  I should  jest 
(though  I did  smile)  in  this  case,  or  that  I 
should  speak  false  of  one.  I will  let  you  see 
him  in  a clear  light.  This  man  cares  not 
with  whom  he  picks  up,  or  how  he  talks  : as 
he  talks  now  with  you,  so  will  he  talk  when 
he  is  on  the  bench,  with  ale  by  his  side ; and 
the  more  drink  he  has  in  his  crown,  the  more 
of  these  things  he  hath  in  his  mouth.  Faith 
hath  no  place  in  his  heart,  or  house,  or 
speech  : all  that  he  hath  lies  in  his  tongue, 
and  his  faith  is  to  make  a noise  with.” 

Fai. — “ Say  you  so  ? then  am  I wrong  in 
my  thoughts  of  this  man.” 

Chr. — “ Wrong  ! You  may  be  sure  of  it : 
think  of  the  trite  phrase,  ‘ They  say,  and  do 
not.’  He  talks  of  what  it  is  to  pray;  to 
mourn  for  sin  ; of  faith,  and  of  the  new  birth  ; 


J.^O  Tfie  Pilgvinis  Progress. 

but  he  knows  but  how  to  talk  of  them.  I 
have  been  in  his  home,  and  have  seen  him 
both  in  and  out  of  doors,  and  I know  what  I 
say  of  him  is  the  truth.  His  house  is  as  void 
of  the  fear  of  God  as  the  white  of  an  egg  is  of 
taste.  They  pray  not  there,  nor  is  there  a 
sign  of  grief  for  sin  : yea,  the  brute,  in  his 
kind,  serves  God  more  than  he.  He  is  the 
great  stain,  scorn,  and  shame  of  faith  to  all 
that  know  him  ; it  can  scarce  have  a good 
word  in  all  that  end  of  the  town  where  he 
dwells,  through  him.  Thus  say  the  low  folk 
that  know  him  : ‘ A saint  in  the  streets,  and 
a fiend  at  home.’  His  poor  kin  find  it  so; 
he  is  such  a churl,  and  rails  at,  and  wants  so 
much  from  those  who  serve  him,  that  they 
know  not  how  to 'do  for  or  speak  to  him. 
Men  that  deal  with  him  in  the  least  way  say 
it  were  best  to  deal  with  a Turk  than  with 
him  for  the  right  they  shall  have  at  his 
hands.  This  d'alkative,  if  it  can  so  be,  will 
pit  his  wits  with  theirs,  and  scheme  and  cheat 
them.  More  than  this,  he  brings  up  his  sons 
to  tread  in  his  steps,  and  if  he  finds  in  one  or 
more  of  them  a weak  fear  (for  so  he  calls  the 


Talkative. 


131 

first  sign  of  a just  mind),  he  calls  them  fools 
and  dolts,  and  by  no  means  will  give  them 
much  to  do,  or  speak  in  their  praise  to  his 
friends.  For  my  part  I do  think  that  he  has 
by  his  vile  life  led  some  to  trip  and  fall,  and 
will  be,  if  God  stays  it  not,  the  bane  of  still 
far  more.” 

Fai. — “Well,  my  friend,  I am  bound  to 
trust  you  ; not  for  that  you  say  you  know 
him,  but  in  like  way,  for  that,  like  one  who 
has  the  mind  of  Christ,  you  judge  of  men. 
For  I durst  not  think  that  you  speak  these 
things  of  spite,  but  for  that  it  is  just  as 
you  say.” 

Chr. — “ Flad  I known  him  no  more  than 
you  I might,  it  may  be,  have  thought  of  him 
as  at  the  first  you  did ; yea,  had  I got  this 
tale  but  from  their  hands  who  are  foes  to 
faith,  I should  have  thought  it  had  been  false 
(a  lot  that  oft  falls  from  bad  men’s  mouths  on 
good  men’s  names  and  works) ; but  all  these 
things,  yea,  and  much  more  as  bad,  which  I 
do  bring  to  mind,  I can  prove  him  to  have 
the  guilt  of.  More  than  this,  good  men  keep 
out  of  his  way  ; they  do  not  look  on  him  as 


132 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


one  who  fears  the  Lord,  nor  do  they  call  him 
friend : to  give  vent  to  his  name  in  their 
midst  makes  them  blush  if  they  know  him.” 

Fai. — “ Well,  I see  that  to  say  and  to  do 
are  two  things  ; and  by  and  by  I shall  take 
more  note  of  this.” 

Chr. — “ They  are  two  things,  in  sooth, 
and  are  no  more  like  than  are  the  soul  and 
flesh ; for,  as  the  flesh  void  of  the  soul  is  but 
a dead  lump : so  to  say,  if  it  stand  loose,  is 
but  a dead  lump  too.  The  soul  of  faith  is 
the  main  part.  This  Talkative  does  not 
know.  He  thinks  that  to  hear  and  to  say 
will  make  a good  man,  and  thus  he  cheats  his 
own  soul.  To  hear  is  but  to  sow  the  seed  ; to 
talk  is  not  full  proof  that  fruit  is  deep  in  the 
heart  and  life  ; and  let  us  feel  sure  that  at  the 
day  of  doom  men  shall  reap  just  as  they  have 
sown.  It  will  not  be  said  then,  ‘ Did  you 
have  faith  ?’  but  ‘ Did  you  do  or  talk  ?'  when 
they  shall  have  their  due  meed.  The  end  of 
the  world  is  like  to  the  time  in  which  we 
reap,  and  you  know  that  when  corn  is  ripe 
and  cut,  men  at  this  time  prize  naught  but 
fruit.  Not  that  aught  but  faith  can  meet  with 


Talkative. 


133 


God’s  smile ; but  I speak  this  to  show  you 
of  what  slight  worth  the  airs  of  a saint,  which 
Talkative  puts  on,  will  be  at  that  day.” 

Fai. — “ This  brings  to  my  mind  that  of 
Moses,  by  which  he  shows  the  beast  that  is 
clean  : he  is  such  an  one  that  parts  the  hoof 
and  chews  the  cud,  not  that  parts  the  hoof 
and  no  more,  or  that  chews  the  cud  and  no 
more.  The  hare  chews  the  cud,  but  yet  is  not 
clean,  for  that  he  parts  not  the  hoof.  And 
this,  in  truth,  is  like  to  Talkative.  He  chew's 
the  cud ; he  seeks  lore ; he  chews  on  the 
word  ; but  he  parts  not  the  hoof ; he  parts 
not  with  the  way  of  bad  men ; but,  as  the 
hare,  keeps  the  foot  of  a dog  or  bear,  and  for 
this  cause  he  is  not  clean.” 

Chr. — “ You  have  said,  for  aught  I know, 
the  true  sense  of  those  texts,  and  I will  add 
one  more  thought.  Paul  calls  some  men,  yea, 
and  those  who  talk  so  great,  too,  things 
with  no  life  in  their  sound.  ‘ Things  with  no 
life,’  that  is  void  of  the  true  faith  and  grace 
of  Christ ; and  hence  things  that  shall  not 
find  a place  with  those  who  are  the  sons  of 
life,  though  their  sound,  by  their  talk,  be  as 


134 


The  Pil<yrivis  ProQi'ess. 

o 

if  it  were  the  tongue  or  voice  of  one  of  the 
bright  host  on  high.” 

Fai  — “Well,  I was  not  so  fond  to  be 
with  him  at  first,  but  am  as  sick  of  him  now. 
What  shall  we  do  to  be  rid  of  him  ?” 

Cur. — “ Be  led  by  me,  and  do  as  I bid 
you,  and  you  shall  find  that  he  will  soon  be 
sick  of  you,  too,  save  God  shall  touch  his 
heart  and  turn  it.” 

Fai. — “ What  would  you  have  me  to  do?’' 

Chr. — “ Why,  go  to  him,  and  take  up 
some  grave  theme  on  the  might  of  faith  ; 
and  ask  him  in  plain  words  (when  he  has 
said  he  thinks  like  you,  for  that  he  will) 
if  this  thing  be  set  up  in  his  heart,  house, 
or  walk  ?” 

Then  F'aithful  gave  a step  forth  once 
more,  and  said  to  Talkative,  “ Come,  what 
cheer?  how  is  it  now?” 

Talk. — “ Thank  you,  well  ; I thought  we 
should  have  had  a great  deal  of  talk  by 
this  time.” 

Bai. — “Well,  if  you  will,  we  will  fall  to 
it  now;  and  since  you  left  it  with  me  to 
state  the  theme,  let  it  be  this  : Mow  doth 


Talkative. 


*35 


the  grace  of  God  that  saves,  show  forth  signs 
when  it  is  in  the  heart  of  man  ?” 

Talk. — “ I see,  then,  that  our  talk  must 
be  of  the  might  of  things.  Well,  it  is  a 
right  good  theme,  and  I shall  try  to  speak 
on  it  ; and  take  what  I say  in  brief,  thus  ; 
First,  where  the  grace  of  God  is  in  the  heart 
it  makes  one  cry  out  on  sin.  In  the  next 
place ” 

Fai. — “ Nay,  hold  ; let  us  dwell  on  one 
at  once  : I think  you  should  say  in  lieu  of 
this,  it  shows  by  the  way  in  which  the  soul 
loathes  its  sin.” 

Talk. — “ Why,  is  it  not  the  same  thing 
to  cry  out  on  and  to  loathe  sin  ?” 

Fai. — “ Oh  ! why  not  at  all.  A man,  may 
cry  out  on  sin  to  aid  his  own  ends,  but  he 
fails  to  loathe  it,  save  God  makes  him  do  so. 
I have  heard  some  cry  out  on  it  from  the 
desk  in  church,  who  yet  can  hold  it  right  well 
in  the  heart,  house,  and  walk.  Some  cry  out 
on  sin,  just  as  the  dame  doth  cry  out  on 
her  child  in  her  lap,  when  she  ealls  it  slut 
and  l>ad  girl,  and  then  falls  to  to  hug  and 
kiss  it. 


136  The  Pilgrims  Progress. 

Talk. — “You  lie  at  the  catch,  I see.” 

Fai. — “ No,  not  I ; I but  try  to  set  things 
right.  But  what  is  the  next  thing  by  which 
you  would  prove  to  make  known  the  work  of 
grace  in  the  heart  ?” 

Talk. — “To  know  much  of  the  deep 
things  of  God.” 

F'ai. — “This  sign  should  have  been  first; 
but,  first  or  last,  it  too  is  false : for  to  know, 
and  know  well,  the  deep  things  in  God’s 
Word,  may  still'  be,  and  yet  no  work  of 
grace  in  the  soul.  Yea,  if  a man  know  all 
things  he  may  yet  be  naught ; and  so,  for 
this  cause,  be  no  child  of  God.  When 
Christ  said,  ‘ Do  you  know  all  these 
things  ?’  and  those  who  heard  him  said, 
‘ Yes  he  did  add,  ‘ Blest  are  ye  if  ye  do 
them.’  He  doth  not  lay  the  grace  in  that 
one  knows,  but  in  that  one  does  them.  For 
to  know  is  not,  of  needs  be,  to  do  : ‘ He  that 
knows  his  Lord’s  will,  and  does  it  not.’  A 
man  may  know  like  one  of  the  bright  throng 
on  high,  and  yet  be  none  of  Christ’s  : hence 
your  sign  is  not  true.  F'or,  in  sooth,  to  know 
is  a thing  that  doth  please  such  as  talk  and 


Talkative, 


137 


boast ; but  to  do  is  that  which  doth  please 
God.  Not  that  the  heart  can  be  good  void 
of  that  which  is  wise ; for  stript  of  that  the 
heart  is  naught.  There  is,  then,  lore  and 
lore ; one  sort  rests  in  the  bare  view  of  things, 
and  the  next,  sort  is  fraught  with  the  grace 
of  faith  and  love,  which  puts  a man  in  the 
way  to  do  the  will  of  God  from  the  heart : 
the  first  of  these  will  serve  him  who  talks, 
but  save  he  has  the  next,  the  true  friend  of 
Christ  does  not  rest  at  ease.  Give  me  this, 
‘ and  I shall  keep  thy  law  : yea,  I shall  keep 
it  with  my  whole  heart.’  ” 

Talk. — “ You  lie  at  the  catch,  once  more : 
this  is  not  for  good.” 

Fai. — “Well,  if  you  please,  give  one 
more  sign  how  this  work  of  grace  doth 
show  where  it  is.” 

Talk. — “ Not  I,  for  I see  we  shall  not  be 
of  one  mind.’' 

Fai. — “ Well,  if  you  will  not,  will  you 
give  me  leave  to  do  it?” 

Talk. — “ You  may  do  just  as  you  like.” 

Fai. — “ A work  of  grace  in  the  soul  doth 
show  quite  clear  to  him  that  hath  it,  or  to 


138  The  Pilgrims  Progress. 

those  that  stand  by.  To  him  that  hath  it, 
thus  : it  gives  him  a deep  sense  of  sin,  of  the 
ill  that  dwells  in  him,  and  the  sin  of  lack  of 
faith,  for  the  sake  of  which  he  is  sure  to  lose 
his  soul,  if  he  find  not  grace  at  God’s  hand 
by  faith  in  Christ.  This  sight  and  sense  of 
things  work  in  him  grief  and  shame  for  sin  ; 
he  finds,  too,  brought  to  view  the  Saviour  of 
the  world,  and  he  feels  he  must  close  with 
him  for  life;  at  the  which  he  finds  he  craves 
and  thirsts  for  him  ; to  which  things  God’s 
Word  holds  forth  sure  grants.  Now,  just  as 
his  faith  in  Christ  is  weak  or  strong,  so  is  his 
joy  and  peace,  so  is  his  love  for  what  is  pure, 
so  is  his  wish  to  know  him  more,  and,  in  like 
way,  to  serve  him  in  this  world.  But  though, 
I say,  it  shows  thus  to  him,  yet  it  is  but  rare 
that  he  can  judge  that  this  is  a work  of  grace: 
for  this  cause,  that  the  ill  that  cleaves  to  him, 
and  his  poor  scope  of  thought,  make  his  mind 
to  take  a false  view  of  it ; hence  in  him  that 
hath  this  work  there  is  need  for  a sound  head, 
ere  he  can  with  care  feel  sure  that  this  is  a 
work  of  grace.  To  some  it  is  thus  shown  : 
b'irst,  by  an  act  of  faith  in  Christ,  which 


Talkative. 


»39 


comes  from  the  soul ; next,  by  a life  that  suits 
such  act : to  wit,  a pure  life,  pure  at  heart, 
pure  with  his  kin  (if  he  hath  kin),  and  pure 
in  speech  in  the  world : which  in  the  broad 
sense  doth  teach  him  in  his  heart  to  hate  his 
sin,  to  spurn  it  from  his  home,  and  to  shed 
his  light  in  the  world  ; not  by  mere  talk,  as  a 
false  knave,  or  one  with  a glib  tongue,  may 
do,  but  by  the  force  of  faith  and  love  to  the 
might  of  the  Word.  And  now,  sir,  as  to 
these  brief  thoughts  on  the  work  of  grace, 
and  on  the  modes  by  which  it  is  known,  if 
you  have  aught  to  say,  say  on  ; if  not,  then 
give  me  leave  to  ask  one  thing  more  of  you.” 

Talk.— “ Nay,  my  part  is  not  now  to  say 
aught,  but  to  hear ; let  me  hence  hear  what 
you  have  got  to  speak.” 

Fai. — “ It  is  this  : do  you  in  your  heart 
feel  this  first  part  of  what  I said  of  it?  and 
doth  your  life  and  walk  bear  proof  of  the 
same?  or  stands  your  faith  ‘in  word  or  in 
tongue,’  and  not  ‘ in  deed  and  truth  ?’  Pray, 
if  you  wish  to  speak  to  me  on  this,  say  no 
more  than  you  know  the  God  on  high  will 
say,  ‘ So  be  it’  to  ; and  naught  but  what  your 


140 


The  Pilgrinis  Progress. 


heart  can  clear  you  in  : more  than  this,  to  say 

I am  thus  and  thus,  when  my  walk  and  all 

those  that  know  me  tell  me  I lie,  is  a great 
• )) 

Sin. 

Then  Talkative  at  first  did  blush,  but 
when  he  got  through  this  phase,  thus  he  said  : 
“ You  come  now  to  what  one  feels  in  his 
heart,  to  the  soul,  and  God  ; and  to  call  on 
him  in  test  of  what  is  said.  This  kind  of 
talk  I did  not  look  for ; nor  shall  I say  a word 
on  such  themes  ; for  that  I count  not  I am 
bound  to  do  so,  save  you  take  on  you  to  teach 
me  ; and,  though  you  should  do  so,  yet  I may 
not  please  to  make  you  my  judge.  But  1 
pray,  will  you  tell  me  why  you  ask  me  such 
things  ?” 

Fai. — “ For  that  I saw  you  prone  to  talk, 
and  for  that  I knew  not  that  you  had  aught 
else  but  vague  views.  More  than  this,  to  tell 
you  all  the  truth,  I have  heard  of  you  that  you 
are  a man  whose  faith  lies  in  talk,  and  that 
your  walk  gives  this  what  you  say  with  your 
mouth  the  lie.  They  say  you  are  a spot  with 
those  that  are  of  Christ’s  flock,  and  that  faith 
fares  the  worse  for  your  mode  of  life ; that 


J 


"talkative.  141 

your  bad  ways,  ere  this,  have  made  some  fall, 
and  that  more  still  are  in  risk  of  bane  by 
them.  What  you  do  gives  the  lie  to  what 
you  say.” 

Talk. — “ Since  you  are  so  quick  to  take 
up  tales,  and  to  judge  in  so  rash  a way  as  you 
do,  I would  lief  think  that  you  are  some  cross 
or  dull  mope  of  a man,  not  fit  to  hold  talk 
with  ; and  so,  I take  my  leave.” 

Then  came  up  Christian,  and  said  to 
his  friend,  “ I told  you  how  it  would  hap ; 
your  words  and  his  lusts  could  not  suit.  He 
thought  it  best  to  leave  you,  than  change  his 
life  : but  he  is  gone  as  I said  : let  him  go, 
the  loss  is  no  man’s  but  his  own.  We  should 
have  had  to  go  from  him  : now  he  doth  save 
us  that  work ; for,  should  he  still  stay  (as  I 
dare  say  he  will  do)  as  he  is,  he  would  have 
been  but  a blot  in  our  ranks.  More  than 
this.  Saint  Paul  tells  us  to  come  out  from 
such.” 

Fai. — “ But  I am  glad  we  had  this  brief 
talk  ; it  may  hap  that  he  will  think  of  it  some 
time ; at  least,  I have  dealt  plain  with  him, 
and  so  am  clear  of  his  blood  if  he  be  lost.” 


142 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


Chr. — “ You  did  well  to  talk  so  plain  to 
him  as  you  did  ; there  is  not  much  of  this 
straight  course  with  men  in  these  days,  and 
that  makes  faith  to  stink  in  the  nose  of  some 
as  it  doth  ; for  they  are  these  fools  that  let 
their  tongues  wag,  whose  faith  is  but  in 
words,  and  who  are  vain  and  not  chaste  in 
their  lives ; yet  get  they  with  those  who  serve 
God,  set  the  world  in  a maze,  slur  the  truth 
of  Christ,  and  grieve  the  good.  I wish  that 
all  men  would  deal  with  such  as  you  have 
done : then  should  they  have  to  change  their 
ways,  or  the  guild  of  saints  would  be  too  hot 
for  them. 

“ How  Talkative  at  first  lifts  up  his  plumes  ! 

And  such  brave  words  doth  speak  ! How  he  would  fain 
Drive  down  all  things  in  his  way  ! But  so  soon 
As  Faithful  talks  of  work  of  heart,  like  the 
Moon  that’s  past  the  full,  then  ere  long  doth  wane, 

And  so  will  all  but  he  who  that  work  knows.” 

Thus  they  went  on  and  told  of  what  they 
had  seen  by  the  way,  and  so  made  that  way 
light  which  would,  were  not  this  the  case,  no 
doubt  have  been  slow  to  them ; for  now  they 
went  through  a wild. 


143 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

VANITY  FAIR. 

OW  when  they  were  got  all  but  quite 
out  of  this  wild,  Faithful  by  chance 
cast  his  eye  back,  and  saw  one 
come  in  his  wake,  and  he  knew  him. 
Oh ! said  Faithful  to  his  friend,  “ Who 
comes  yon  ?” 

Then  Christian  did  look,  and  said,  “ It  is 
my  good  friend  Evangelist.”  “Ay,  and  my 
good  friend,  too,”  said  Faithful,  “ for  it  was  he 
that  set  me  the  way  to  the  gate.”  Now  was 
Evangelist  come  up  with  them,  and  thus  did 
greet  them  : — 

“ Peace  be  with  you,  my  dear  friend  whom 
I well  love  : and  peace  be  to  such  as  help 
you.” 

Chr. — “ Glad  to  see  you,  my  good  Evan- 
gelist : the  sight  of  thy  face  brings  to  my 
mind  thy  past  kind  acts  and  long  toil  for  my 
chief  good.” 

“And  right  glad,  too,  am  I to  meet  with 


44 


The  Pilgrims  ProQresS. 

O o 


you,  O sweet  Evangelist;  how  great  a boon 
is  it  to  us  poor  wights !” 

Then  said  Evangelist,  “ How  did  it  fare 
witly  you,  my  friends,  sinee  the  time  we  last 
did  part  ? what  have  you  met  with,  and  what 
has  been  your  life  ?” 

Then  Christian  and  Faithful  told  him  of 
all  things  that  did  hap  to  them  in  the  way  ; 
and  how,  and  with  what  toil,  they  had  got 
to  that  place. 

“ Right  glad  am  I,”  said  Evangelist,  “ not 
that  you  met  with  straits,  but  that  you  have 
come  safe  through  them,  and  for  that  you 
have,  in  spite  of  some  faults,  kept  in  the  way 
to  this  day.  I say,  right  glad  am  I of  this 
thing,  and  that  for  mine  own  sake  and  yours. 
I did  sow,  and  you  did  reap ; and  the  day  is 
near  when  both  of  us  shall  have  joy  of  this ; 
that  is,  if  you  hold  out ; ‘ for  in  due  time  ye 
shall  reap,  if  ye  faint  not.’  The  crown  is  in 
sight  of  you,  and  it  is  one  that  will  not  rust ; 
‘ so  run  that  you  may  gain  it.’  Some  there 
be  that  set  out  for  this  crown,  and  when  they 
have  gone  far  for  it,  some  one  comes  in  and 
takes  it  from  them  : ‘ hold  fast  then  that  you 


Vanity  Fair. 


U5 


have,  that  no  man  take  your  crown.’  You  an 
not  yet  out  of  the  range  of  the  foul  fiend  : let 
the  joy  of  the  Lord  be  not  lost  sight  of,  and 
have  a firm  faith  in  things  not  seen.  Let 
naught  that  is  on  this  side  of  the  next  world 
get  hold  of  you ; and,  more  than  all,  look 
well  to  your  own  hearts  and  to  the  lusts  of  it ; 
set  your  face  like  a flint ; you  have  all  might 
from  on  high  and  in  earth  on  your  side.” 

Then  did  Christian  thank  him  for  his  sage 
words,  but  told  him  at  the  same  time,  that 
they  would  have  him  speak  more  to  them  for 
their  help  the  rest  of  the  way ; and  this, 
for  that  they  well  knew  he  was  a seer,  and 
could  tell  them  of  things  that  might  fall  out 
to  them,  and  in  like  way,  how  they  might 
thwart  and  sway  them.  To  which  wish 
Faithful  gave  heed.  So  Evangelist  spoke 
thus : — 

“ My  sons,  you  have  heard  in  the  truth  of 
God’s  Word,  that  you  must  pass  through 
sharp  straits  to  reach  the  realm  of  bliss  ; and 
hence  you  must  not  think  that  you  should  go 
long  on  your  way,  and  not  meet  with  them,  in 
some  sort.  You  have  erst  found  out  part  of 


146 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


this  truth  ; and  more  will  soon  come  : for 
now  as  you  see  you  are  just  out  of  this  wild, 
and  hence  you  will  ere  long  come  to  a town 
that  you  will  by  and  by  see  in  front  of  you  ; 
and  in  that  town  you  will  be  set  round  with 
foes,  who  will  strain  hard  but  they  will  kill 
you  : and  be  you  sure  that  one  or  both  of  you 
must  seal  the  faith,  which  you  hold,  with 
blood  : when  ‘ the  King  will  give  you  a 
crown  of  life/  He  that  shall  die  there, 
though  his  death  will  be  out  of  course,  and 
his  pain  may  be  great,  he  will  yet  have  the 
best  of  his  friend  : not  for  that  he  will  reach 
the  Celestial  City  first,  but  for  that  he  will 
scape  a load  of  griefs  that  the  one  will  meet 
with  in  the  rest  of  his  way.  But  when  you 
are  come  to  the  town,  and  shall  find  what  I 
have  said  come  to  pass,  then  think  of  your 
friend,  and  quit  you  both  like  men.” 

Then  I saw  in  my  dream  that,  when  they 
were  got  out  of  the  wild,  they  soon  saw  a 
town  in  front  of  them  ; the  name  of  that 
town  is  Vanity  ; and  at  the  town  there  is  a 
fair  kept,  known  as  Vanity-fair;  it  is  kept  all 
the  year  long : it  bears  the  name  of  Vanity- 


Vanity  Fair. 


147 


fair  for  that  the  town  where  it  is  kept  is  light 
and  vain,  and,  in  like  way,  for  that  all  that  is 
there  sold,  or  that  comes  there,  is  vain  tco. 

The  fair  is  no  new  trade,  but  a thing  that 
has  stood  long.  I will  show  you  how  it  first 
came.  Age  on  age  back,  there  were  some  on 
their  way  to  the  Celestial  City,  as  these  two 
good  folk  are,  when  the  hosts  of  Flell,  with 
their  chiefs,  saw,  by  the  path  that  they  made, 
that  their  way  to  the  place  lay  through  this 
town  of  Vanity  : here  they  set  up  a fair  ; a 
fair  in  which  should  be  sold  all  sorts  of  vain 
wares  ; and  that  should  last  all  the  year  long; 
hence  at  this  fair  are  all  such  goods  sold  as 
lands,  trades,  realms,  lusts,  and  gay  things  of 
all  sorts,  as  lives,  blood,  souls,  gold,  pearls, 
stones  of  great  worth,  and  what  not.  And, 
more  than  this,  at  this  fair  there  are  at  all 
times  to  be  seen  cheats,  games,  plays,  fools, 
apes,  knaves  and  rogues,  and  that  of  each 
kind.  Here  are  to  be  seen,  too,  and  that  for 
naught,  thefts  and  crimes  of  all  hues. 

And  as  in  fairs  of  less  note  there  are 
rows  and  streets,  with  their  right  names, 
where  such  and  such  wares  are  sold,  so 


148 


The  Pil^rinis  Progress. 


here,  in  like  way,  you  have  the  right  rows, 
streets  (that  is,  lands  and  realms),  where  the 
wares  of  this  fair  are  most  soon  to  be  found. 
Here  is  the  Britain  Row,  the  French  Row, 
the  Italian  Row,  the  Spanish  Row,  the 
German  Row,  where  all  sorts  of  vain  things 
are  to  be  sold.  But,  as  in  most  fairs,  some 
one  thing  is  as  the  chief  of  all  the  fair,  so  the 
ware  of  Rome  and  her  trade  is  most  brisk  in 
this  fair ; but  our  Realm,  with  some  more, 
do  not  at  all  like  it. 

Now,  as  I said,  the  way  to  the  Celestial 
City  lies  just  through  this  town  where  this 
huge  fair  is  kept : and  he  that  will  go  there, 
and  yet  not  go  through  this  town,  “ must 
needs  go  out  of  the  world.”  The  Lord  of 
Lords,  when  here,  went  through  this  town  to 
his  own  realm,  and  that,  too,  on  a day  when 
a fair  was  held  : yea,  and  as  I think,  it  was 
Beelzebub,  the  chief  lord  of  this  fair,  that 
sought  of  him  to  buy  of  his  vain  wares  : yea, 
would  have  made  him  Lord  of  the  fair,  did 
he  but  bow  to  him  as  he  went  through  the 
town.  Yea,  for  that  he  was  so  great  a prince, 
the  fiend  had  him  from  street  to  street,  and 


Vanity  Fair. 


149 


did  show  him  all  the  realms  of  the  world  in 
a short  time,  that  he  might,  could  such  a 
thing  be,  snare  that  Pure  One  to  bid  for  and 
buy  some  of  his  wares.  But  he  had  no  mind 
to  the  goods,  and  hence  left  the  town,  nor  did 
he  lay  out  so  much  as  a mite  on  these  wares. 
This  fair,  for  such  cause,  is  an  old  thing,  has 
stood  a long  while,  and  is  a great  fair. 

Now  these  folk,  as  I said,  must  needs  go 
through  this  fair.  Well,  so  they  did  ; but  lo, 
just  as  they  got  to  the  fair,  all  the  crowd  in 
the  fair  rose  up,  and  the  town,  too,  as  it  were, 
and  made  much  noise  and  stir  for  that  they 
came  there.  The  first  -cause  was,  that  the 
strange  folk  were  clad  with  such  kind  of 
garb  as  was  not  like  the  clothes  of  one  that 
bought  at  that  fair.  Hence  the  mob  of  the 
fair  did  stare  much  at  them  : some  said  they 
were  fools  ; some,  they  were  mad  ; and  some, 
they  were  men  from  some  far  off  land.  Next, 
And  as  they  thought  their  clothes  strange,  so 
did  they,  in  like  way,  their  speech  ; for  few 
could  tell  what  they  said  ; they,  of  course, 
spoke  the  tongue  of  Canaan  ; but  they^  that 
liept  the  fair  were  the  men  of  thi§  WQr!4  « §0 


150  Tlie  Pilgnius  Progress. 

that,  from  end  to  end  of  the  fair,  they  did 
seem  strange  each  to  each.  In  the  third 
place,  But  that  which  made  the  crowd  most 
laugh  was,  that  these  men  set  quite  light  by 
all  their  wares  ; they  did  not  care  so  much  as 
to  look  on  them  ; and,  if  they  sought  for  them 
to  buy,  they  would  stop  their  ears,  and  cry, 
“ Turn  off  mine  eyes,  lest  they  see  vain 
things,”  and  look  up,  to  show  that  their 
trade  and  wares  were  in  the  skies. 

One  did  chance,  just  to  mock,  when  he 
saw  the  gait  of  the  men,  to  say  to  them, 
“ What  will  ye  buy?”  but  they  gave  him  a 
grave  look,  and  said,  “ We  buy  the  truth.” 
At  that  there  was  fresh  cause  for  them  to 
loathe  the  men  the  more  : some  did  mock, 
some  did  taunt,  some  spoke  vile  words,  and 
some  told  their  friends  to  smite  them.  At 
last  things  came  to  a sad  pass,  which  led  to 
great  stir  in  the  fair,  so  that  all  was  noise  and 
din,  and  law  was  set  at  naught.  Now  was 
word  soon  brought  to  the  great  one  of  the 
fair,  who  at  once  came  down,  and  sent  some 
of  his  best  friends  to  sift  those  men  by  whom 
the  fair  was  put  in  such  a state.  So  the  men 


Vanity  Fair. 


151 


were  brought  in  their  sight ; and  they  that 
sat  on  them  did  ask  them  whence  they  came, 
to  what  place  they  went,  and  what  they  did 
^ there  in  such  a queer  garb?  The  men  told 
them  that  they  were  not  of  this  world ; and 
that  they  were  bound  to  their  own  land, 
which  was  on  high ; and  that  they  gave  no 
cause  to  the  men  of  the  town,  nor  yet  to 
those  who  sold  wares,  thus  to  ill  use  them, 
and  to  let  them  in  their  way  ; save  it  was  for 
that,  when  one  did  ask  them  what  they  would 
buy,  they  said  they  would  “ buy  the  truth.” 
But  they  that  were  sent  to  sift  them  did  not 
think  them  to  be  aught  than  fools  and  mad, 
or  else  such  as  came  to  put  all  things  out  of 
gear  in  the  fair.  Hence  they  took  them  and 
beat  them,  and  made  them  grime  with  dirt, 
and  then  put  them  in  the  cage,  that  they 
might  be  made  a foul  sight  to  all  the  men 
of  the  fair.  There  then  they  lay  for  some 
time,  and  were  made  the  butt  for  men’s  sport, 
cuffs,  or  ire  : while  the  great  one  of  the  fair 
did  laugh  still  at  all  that  fell  to  their  lot. 
But  as  the  men  bore  up  well,  and  did  not 
rail,  but  gave  good  words  for  bad,  and  strove 


152 


The  Pilgrim  s Progress. 


to  act  in  a kind  way  with  those  that  had  done 
them  wrong  ; some  men  in  the  fair,  that  were 
more  cute  and  just  than  the  rest,  sought  to 
check  and  chide  the  base  sort  for  the  vile 
acts  done  by  them  to  the  men.  They  hence, . 
in  gruff  mood,  let  fly  at  them  once  more,  said 
they  were  as  bad  as  the  men  in  the  cage,  and 
told  them  that  they  were  birds  of  the  same 
sort,  and  should  be  made  to  share  in  their 
stripes.  One  said,  “ That  for  aught  they 
could  see,  the  men  were  mild,  and  of  sound 
mind,  and  sought  to  do  harm  to  no  one ; and 
that  there  were  some,  that  did  trade  in  their 
fair,  that  ought  far  more  to  be  put  in  the 
cage,  yea,  and  the  stocks,  too,  than  the  men 
to  whom  they  had  done  such  ill.”  Thus,  as 
soon  as  hot  words  did  pass  on  both  sides 
(the  men  all  the  while  bore  a wise  and  calm 
mien  in  their  sight),  they  fell  to  some  blows, 
and  did  harm  each  to  each.  Then  were  these 
two  poor  men  brought  up  once  more,  when  a 
charge  was  made  that  it  was  they  who  had 
got  up  the  row  that  had  been  at  the  fair.  So 
they  beat  them  in  a harsh  way,  and  hung 
(;hains  on  them,  and  led  thenn  in  gyves  up 


Vanity  Fair. 


153 


and  down  the  fair,  so  as  to  warn  folk  lest 
they  should  speak  for  them,  or  join  with 
them.  But  Christian  and  Faithful  bore  the 
shame  and  the  slur  that  was  cast  on  them  in 
so  calm  and  meek  a way  that  it  won  to  their 
side  (though  but  few  to  count  them  with  the 
rest)  some  of  the  men  of  the  fair.  This  put 
one  part  of  the  crowd  in  a still  more  fierce 
rage,  so  that  they  were  bent  on  the  death  of 
these  two  men.  For  which  cause  they  made 
a threat  that  nor  cage  nor  chains  should  serve 
their  turn,  but  that  they  should  die  for  the  ill 
they  had  done,  and  for  that  they  did  cheat 
the  men  of  the  fair. 

Then  were  they  sent  back  to  the  cage 
once  more,  till  it  was  told  what  should  be 
done  with  them.  So  they  put  them  in,  and 
made  their  feet  fast  in  the  stocks. 

Here,  then,  they  once  more  brought  to 
mind  what  they  had  heard  from  their  true 
friend  Evangelist,  and  were  the  more  strong 
in  their  way  and  woes  by  what  he  told  them 
would  fall  out  to  them.  They,  too,  now 
sought  to  cheer  the  heart  of  each,  that  whose 
lot  it  was  to  die  that  he  should  have  the  best 


154 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


of  it : hence  each  man  did  wish  in  the  depth 
of  his  soul  that  he  might  have  the  crown.  So 
they  left  their  fate  to  Him  that  rules  all  things 
well,  and  bode  in  the  state  in  which  they 
were  till  they  knew  what  should  be  done  witli 
them. 

Then  in  due  time  they  brought  them  forth 
to  court,  so  that  they  might  meet  their  doom. 
When  the  time  was  come  they  were  brought 
in  face  of  their  foes  and  put  in  the  dock,  when 
the  charge  was  read.  The  name  of  the  judge 
was  Lord  Hate-good  ; their  plaint  was  one 
and  the  same  in  fact,  though  not  in  form,  the 
heads  of  which  were  these;  “That  they  were 
foes  to,  and  broke  up,  their  trade  ; that  they 
had  made  broils  and  feuds  in  the  town,  and 
had  won  some  to  their  own  most  vile  views, 
in  scorn  of  the  law  of  their  prince.” 

Then  Faithful  said  “ that  he  did  but  spurn 
that  which  had  set  up  in  face  of  Him  that  is 
the  Most  High.  And,”  said  he,  “as  for  broils, 
I make  none,  as  I am  a man  of  peace  ; those 
that  were  won  to  us  were  won  by  their  view 
of  our  truth  and  pure  lives,  and  they  are  but 
gone  from  the  worse  to  the  best.  And  as  to 


Vanity  Fain. 


155 


tlie  king  you  talk  of,  since  he  is  the  Prince 
of  this  World,  the  foe  of  our  Lord,  I scout 
him  and  all  his  host.” 

Then  was  it  made  known  that  they  that 
had  aught  to  say  for  their  lord  the  king,  to 
prove  the  guilt  of  him  at  the  bar,  should  at 
once  come  forth  and  give  in  their  proof. 
So  there  came  in  three  men,  to  wit.  Envy, 
Superstition,  and  Pickthank.  Then  they 
were  told  to  speak  if  they  knew  him  who 
was  at  the  bar,  and  what  they  had  to  say  for 
their  lord  the  king  to  his  hurt. 

Then  stood  forth  Envy  and  said  in  this 
strain  : “ My  lord,  I have  known  this  man  a 
long  time,  and  will  swear  on  my  oath  in  face 
of  this  high  bench  that  he  is ” 

Judge. — “ Hold,  give  him  his  oath.” 

So  they  sware  him. 

Then  he  .said : “ My  lord,  this  man,  in 
spite  of  his  fair  name,  is  one  of  the  most  vile 
men  in  our  land.  He  cares  not  for  prince  or 
those  whom  he  rules,  for  law  or  right,  but 
does  all  that  he  can  to  fill  all  men  with  some 
of  his  wild  views,  which  tend  to  the  bane  of 
our  realm,  and  which  he  for  the  most  part 


I5<^  ^he  Pilgrims  Progress. 

calls  ‘ grounds  of  faith  and  a pure  life.’  And 
in  chief  I heard  him  once  say  that  the  faith  of 
Christ  and  the  laws  of  our  town  of  Vanity 
could  not  be  at  one,  as  they  were  foes  each  to 
each.  By  which  talk,  my  lord,  he  doth  at 
once  blame  all  our  best  acts,  and  us  for  that 
we  do  them.” 

Then  did  the  judge  say  to  him,  “ Hast 
thou  aught  more  to  say  ?” 

Envy. — “ My  lord,  I could  say  much 
more,  but  I would  not  tire  the  court.  Yet  if 
need  be,  when  more  proof  is  had,  should  it 
want  pith,  that  naught  should  lack,  I will  still 
charge  him,  so  that  the  law  may  hold  him 
tight.”  So  he  was  bid  stand  by. 

Then  did  they  call  Superstition,  and  bid 
him  look  on  the  man  at  the  bar,  and  then  ask 
what  he  could  say  for  their  lord  the  king  to 
bring  each  charge  home  to  him  ? 

Then  they  sware  him  : so  he  said — 

“ My  lord,  I know  not  much  of  this  man, 
nor  do  1 care  to  know  more  of  him  ; but  this 
1 know,  that  he  is  a most  vile  knave,  from 
some  talk  that  a few  days  since  I had  with 
him  in  this  town  ; for  then,  as  I spoke  with 


Vanity  Fair. 


157 


him,  I heard  him  say  that  our  faith  was 
naught,  and  such  by  which  no  man  could 
please  God.  Which  words  of  his,  my  lord, 
you  quite  well  know  what  they  mean,  to  wit, 
that  we  still  work  in  vain,  are  yet  in  our  sins, 
and  at  last  shall  be  lost.  And  this  is  that 
which  I have  to  say.” 

Then  was  Pickthank  sworn,  and  bid  say 
what  he  knew  in  the  cause  of  their  lord  the 
king  to  the  hurt  of  the  rogue  at  the  bar. 

Pick. — “ My  lord,  and  you  great  folk  all, 
this  wight  I have  known  of  a long  time,  and 
have  heard  him  speak  things  that  ought 
not  to  be  said  ; for  he  did  rail  on  our  great 
prince,  Beelzebub,  and  spoke  ill  of  his  firm 
friends,  whose  names  are  Lord  Old-man,  the 
Lord  Carnal -delight,  the  Lord  Luxurious, 
the  Lord  Desire-of-vain-glory,  my  old  Lord 
Lechery,  Sir  Having  Greedy,  with  all  the 
rest  of  our  high  caste ; and  he  hath  said,  too, 
that  if  all  men  were  of  his  mind,  if  so  be, 
there  is  not  one  of  these  great  men  should 
from  that  time  forth  stay  in  this  town.  More 
than  this,  he  hath  not  felt  dread  to  rail  on 
you,  my  lord,  who  are  now  sent  to  be  his 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


158 

judge  ; while  he  set  you  down  for  a base 
wretch,  with  more  low  terms  of  a vile  sort, 
which  he  hath  flung  at  most  of  the  high  folk 
of  our  town.” 

When  this  Pickthank  had  told  his  tale, 
the  judge  spoke  to  the  man  at  the  bar,  and 
said:  “Thou  vile,  base  wretch,  hast  thou 
heard  what  those  just  and  true  men  have 
sworn  to  thy  bane?” 

Fai. — “ May  I speak  a few  words  to  clear 
my  soul  ?” 

Judge.— “Pshaw  ! pshaw!  It  is  not  right 
that  thou  shouldst  live,  but  be  slain  now  on 
the  place  ; yet,  that  all  men  may  see  what 
grace  we  show  thee,  let  us  hear  what  thou 
hast  to  say.” 

Fai. — “ I say  then,  as  a set  off  to  what 
Mr.  Envy  hath  said,  I spoke  not  a word  but 
this,  ‘That  what  rule, or  laws,  or  rights,  or  men, 
are  flat  down  on  the  Word  of  God,  are  foes 
to  the  faith  of  Christ.’  If  I have  said  wrong 
in  this,  but  show  me  that  I err,  and  I will 
here  in  your  sight  call  back  my  words. 

“ As  to  the  next,  to  wit,  Mr.  Superstition, 
and  his  charge  to  my  hurt,  I said  but  this, 


Vanity  Fair. 


159 


‘ That  to  serve  God  one  needs  a faith  from 
on  high  ; but  there  can  be  no  faith  from  on 
high  void  of  the  will  of  God  made  known 
from  the  same  source.  Hence,  all  that  is 
thrust  on  us  that  does  not  square  with 
this  will  of  God,  is  but  of  man’s  faith ; 
which  faith  will  not  serve  the  life  that  is  to 
come.’ 

“ As  to  what  Mr  Pickthank  hath  said  (to 
waive  the  terms,  as  that  I am  said  to  rail  and 
the  like),  ‘ That  the  prince  of  this  town,  with 
all  the  roughs,  his  slaves,  whose  names  we 
have  heard  from  this  squire,  are  more  fit  for 
one  in  hell  than  in  this  town  and  land  and 
so  the  Lord  be  good  to  me.” 

Then  the  judge  said  to  those  who  were  to 
bind  or  loose  him  from  the  charge  (who  all 
this  time  stood  by  to  hear  and  see) : “ Ye  who 
serve  here  to  weigh  this  case,  you  see  this 
man  of  whom  so  great  a din  hath  been  made 
in  this  town  ; you  have  heard,  too,  what  those 
good  squires  have  sworn  to  his  hurt  ; more 
than  this,  you  have  heard  his  speech,  and  his 
own  proof  of  these  facts.  It  doth  lie  now  on 
your  souls  to  hang  him,  or  save  his  life ; 


i6o 


The  Pilgrim! s Progress. 


but  yet  I think  meet  to  teach  you  a few  points 
of  our  law. 

“ There  was  an  act  made  in  the  days  of 
Pharaoh  the  great,  friend  to  our  prince,  that, 
lest  those  of  a wrong  faith  should  spread  and 
grow  too  strong  for  him,  their  males  should  be 
thrown  in  the  stream.  There  was,  in  like 
way,  an  act  made  in  the  days  of  Nebuchad- 
nezzar the  great,  who,  too,  did  serve  him,  that 
such  as  would  not  fall  down  and  laud  the 
form  he  had  set  up,  should  be  flung  in  a pit 
of  fire.  More  than  this,  there  was  an  act 
made  in  the  days  of  Darius,  that  who  did  call 
for  some  time  on  a god  but  him,  should 
be  cast  to  wild  beasts  in  their  den.  Now 
the  pith  of  these  laws  this  rogue  has  set 
at  naught,  not  in  mere  thought  (which  is 
not  to  be  borne),  but  in  word  and  deed  as 
well  ; which  must  needs  shut  him  out  from 
all  hope. 

“ For  that  of  Pharaoh,  his  law  was  made 
on  the  ground  that  as  no  crime  was  yet  seen, 
it  were  well  to  ward  off  slight  ill  : but  here, 
no  doubt,  is  a crime.  Twice,  nay  thrice,  he 
speaks  of  our  creed  as  a thing  of  naught ; 


Vanity  Fair. 


i6i 


and  for  this,  on  his  own  words,  he  needs 
must  die  the  death.” 

Then  went  out  those  who  had  to  weigh 
the  case,  whose  names  were  Mr.  Blindman, 
Mr.  No-good,  Mr.  Malice,  Mr.  Love-lust^ 
Mr.  Live-loose,  Mr.  Heady,  Mr.  High-mind^ 
Mr.  Enmity,  Mr.  Liar,  Mr.  Cruelty,  Mr. 
Hate-light,  and  Mr.  Implacable  ; who  each 
one  gave  in  his  voice  to  Faithful’s  hurt,  in  his 
own  mind  ; and  then  meant  to  make  known 
his  doom  in  face  of  the  judge.  And  first,  Mr. 
Blindman,  the  chief,  said,  “ I see,  most  plain, 
that  this  man  is  a foe.”  Then  said  Mr.  No- 
good, “ Out  with  such  a cur  from  the  earth.’ 
“ Ay,”  said  Mr.  Malice,  “for  I hate  the  mere 
looks  of  him.”  Then  said  Mr.  Love-lust,  “ I, 
for  one,  could  not  bear  him.”  “ Nor  I,”  said 
Mr.  Live-loose,  “ for  he  would  not  cease  to 
chide  my  way.”  “ Hang  him,  hang  him,” 
said  Mr.  Heady.  “ A mean  scrub,”  said  Mr. 
High-mind.”  “ My  heart  hates  him,”  said 
Mr.  Enmity.”  “ He  is  a rogue,”  said  Mr. 
Liar.  “ The  rope  is  too  good  for  him,”  said 
Mr.  Cruelty.  “ Let  us  put  him  out  of  the 
way,”  said  Mr.  Hate-light.  Then  said  Mr. 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


162 


Implacable,  “ Might  I have  all  the  world  for 
a gift,  I could  not  be  a friend  of  his  : hence 
let  us  at  once  doom  him  to  death.”  And 
so  they  did.  The  judge  then  put  on  the 
black  cap,  and  said,  “ That  he  should  be  led 
from  the  place  where  he  was  to  the  place  from 
whence  he  came,  and  there  to  be  put  to  the 
worst  death  that  could  be  thought  of.” 

They  then  brought  him  out  to  do  with 
him  as  the  law  set  forth : and  first  they  whipt 
him  ; then  they  hit  him  with  their  fists  ; then 
they  cut  his  flesh  with  knives  ; then  they  did 
pelt  him  with  stones  ; then  prick  him  with 
their  swords;  and,  last  of  all,  they  burnt  him 
to  dust  at  the  stake.  Thus  came  Faithful  to 
his  end. 

Now  I saw  that  there  stood  in  the  rear  of 
the  crowd  a state  car,  with  two  steeds,  that 
did  wait  for  Faithful ; who,  as  soon  as  his  foes 
had  got  rid  of  him,  was  caught  up  in  it,  and 
straight  sent  off  through  the  clouds,  with 
sound  of  trump,  the  most  near  way  to  the 
Celestial  Gate.  But  as  for  Christian,  he  was 
put  back  to  jail  ; so  there  he  lay  for  a space; 
but  lie  that  rules  all  things,  in  whose  hand 


Vanity  Fair. 


163 


was  the  might  of  their  rage,  so  wrought  it 
that  Christian,  for  that  time,  got  free  from 
them  and  went  his  way. 

Well,  Faithful,  thou  hadst  full  faith  in  thy  Lord, 

With  whom  thou  shalt  hence  dwell ; when  those  who  spurn 
His  laws  shall  cry  in  vain  in  their  dull  plights : 

Sing,  Faithful,  sing ; and  let  thy  name  still  last ; 

Yet  dost  thou  live,  though  erst  burnt  at  the  stake. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


CHRISTIAN  AND  HOPEFUL. 

OW  I saw  in  my  dream  that  Christian 
went  not  forth  with  none  to  cheer 
him  ; for  there  was  one  whose  name 
was  Hopeful  (made  so  by  the  words  and 
mien,  and  the  mode  in  which  Christian  and 
Faithful  bore  their  griefs  at  the  fair),  who  set 
out  with  him,  and  made  a grave  pact  that 
he  would  be  his  friend.  Thus  one  met  death 
for  the  love  of  truth ; while  out  of  his  dust 
comes  forth  Hopeful,  to  go  with  Christian  on 
the  way.  This  Hopeful,  too,  told  Christian 
that  there  were  a lot  more  of  the  men  in  the 
fair  that  would  take  their  time,  and  go  in 
his  track. 

So  I saw  that  when  they  were  just  got 
out  of  the  fair  they  came  up  with  one  that 
had  gone  on  in  front  of  them,  whose  name 
was  By-ends  : so  they  said  to  him,  “ From 
what  land,  sir  ? and  how  far  go  you  this 
way  ?”  He  told  them  that  he  came  from  the 


Christian  and  Hopeful. 


165 


town  of  Fair-speech,  and  was  bound  for  the 
Celestial  City;  but  he  told  them  not  his 
name. 

“ From  Fair-speech  !”  said  Christian  : “ is 
there  aught  good  that  lives  there?” 

“Yes,”  said  By-ends,  “ I hope.” 

Chr. — “ Pray,  sir,  what  may  I call  you?” 

By. — “ I know  not  you,  nor  you  me : if 
you  mean  to  go  this  way,  I shall  be  glad  to 
go  with  you : if  not,  I must  take  things  as 
they  come.” 

Chr. — “This  town  of  Fair-speech  I have 
heard  of  it,  and,  if  my  mind  serves  me,  they 
say  it  is  a rich  place.” 

By. — “ Yes,  I will  pledge  you  that  it  is ; 
and  I have  a fair  share  of  rich  kin  there.” 

Chr. — Pray,  who  are  your  kin  there,  if  a 
man  may  be  so  bold  ?” 

By. — “ Well  nigh  the  whole  town  : and, 
in  chief,  my  Lord  Turn-about,  my  Lord 
Time-server,  my  Lord  Fair-speech,  from 
whose  stock  that  town  first  took  its  name  : 
in  like  way,  Mr.  Smooth-man,  Mr.  Facing- 
both-ways,  Mr.  Any-thing ; and  the  priest 
of  our  place,  Mr.  Two-tongues,  was  of  my 


1 66  The  Pilgrim’s  Progress. 

dame’s  own  kin  by  my  sire’s  side;  and,  to 
tell  you  the  truth,  I am  a squire  of  good 
birth ; yet  my  great  grand  sire  kept  but  a 
skiff ; he  did  look  one  way  and  row  quite 
wide  of  it ; and  I got  most  of  my  lands  by 
the  same  sort  of  work.” 

Chr. — “ Have  you  a wife?” 

By. — “ Yes,  and  my  wife  is  a most  pure 
dame,  the  child  of  a pure  dame  ; she  was  my 
Lady  Feigning’s  child,  hence  she  came  of  a 
proud  stock  ; and  to  such  a pitch  has  she 
been  bred,  that  she  knows  how  to  act  to 
all,  to  prince  and  serf  with  like  grace.  It  is 
true  we,  in  some  way,  hold  not  the  same  faith 
of  the  strict  sort : yet  but  in  two  small  points 
are  we  not  at  one : First,  we  strive  not  in  the 
teeth  of  wind  and  tide  : Next,  we  have  most 
zeal  when  Faith  goes  in  his  sheen  shoes.  We 
love  much  to  walk  with  him  in  the  street  if 
the  sun  shines,  and  the  folk  praise  him.” 

Then  Christian  stept  on  one  side  to  his 
friend  Hopeful,  and  said,  “ It  runs  in  my 
mind  that  this  is  one  By-ends,  of  Fair- 
speech,  and  if  it  be  he,  we  have  as  keen 
a knave  in  our  midst  as  dwells  in  all  these 


Christian  and  Hopeful. 


167 


parts/'  Then  said  Hopeful,  “ Ask  him ; I 
think  he  should  not  blush  at  his  name.” 
So  Christian  came  up  with  him  once  more, 
and  said,  “ Sir,  you  talk  as  if  you  knew  much 
more  than  all  the  world  doth,  and,  if  I take 
not  my  mark  wrong,  I deem  I have  half  a 
guess  of  you  ; is  not  your  name  Mr.  By-ends, 
of  Fair-speech  ?” 

By.— “ This  is  not  my  name ; but,  in 
sooth,  it  is  a name  I got  in  scorn  from 
some  that  do  not  like  me;  and  I must 
needs  bear  it  as  a sneer,  as  the  like  good 
men  have  borne  theirs  ere  me.” 

Chr. — ” But  did  you  not  give  cause  to 
men  to  call  you  by  this  name?” 

By. — “ Not  so ! not  so  ! the  worst  that  I 
did  to  give  them  a cause  to  give  me  this 
name  was,  that  I had,  as  a rule,  the  luck  to 
jump  in  my  thoughts  with  the  staid  way  of 
the  times,  be  it  what  it  might ; and  my  chance 
was  to  get  by  that  means.  But  if  things 
are  thus  cast  on  me,  let  me  count  them  a 
boon,  but  let  not  those  who  wish  me  ill  load 
me  hence  with  shame.” 

Chr. — “ I thought,  in  sooth,  that  you  were 


1 68  The  Pilgrims  Progress. 

the  man  that  I had  heard  of ; and,  to  tell  you 
what  I think,  I fear  this  name  suits  you  more 
than  you  would  wish  we  should  think  it  doth.’' 

By. — “ Well,  if  you  will  thus  think,  I 
durst  not  help  it : you  shall  find  me  a fair 
man,  if  you  will  make  me  one  of  you.” 

Chr. — “ If  you  will  go  with  us,  you 
must  go  in  the  teeth  of  wind  and  tide,  the 
which,  I see,  doth  hurt  your  grain ; you 
must,  in  like  wise,  own  Faith  in  his  rags, 
as  well  as  when  in  his  sheen  shoes  ; and 
stand  by  him,  too,  when  bound  in  chains, 
as  well  as  when  he  walks  the  streets  with 
praise.” 

By. — “You  must  not  curb  my  faith,  nor 
lord  it  in  this  way : leave  me  free  to  think, 
and  let  me  go  with  you.” 

Chr. — “ Not  a step  more,  save  you  will 
do  in  what  I shall  speak  as  we.” 

Then  said  By-ends,  “J  shall  not  cast  off 
my  old  views,  since  they  bring  no  harm,  and 
are  of  use.  If  I may  not  go  with  you,  I must 
do  as  I did  ere  you  came  up  with  me,  that  is, 
go  on  with  no  one,  till  some  will  come  on  who 
will  be  glad  to  meet  me.” 


Christian  and  Hopeful. 


169 


Now  I saw  in  my  dream  that  Christian 
and  Hopeful  left  him,  and  went  on  in  front 
of  him : but  one  of  them  did  chance  to  look- 
back, and  saw  three  men  in  the  wake  of  Mr. 
By-ends,  and  lo,  as  they  came  up  with  him, 
he  made  them  quite  a low  bow ; and  they, 
too,  did  the  same  to  him.  The  men’s  names 
were  Mr.  Hold-the-world,  Mr.  Money-love, 
and  Mr.  Save-all ; men  that  Mr.  By-ends  had 
erst  known  ; for  when  boys  they  were  mates 
at  school,  and  were  taught  by  one  Mr.  Gripe- 
man,  who  keeps  a school  in  Love-gain,  which 
is  a large  town  in  the  shire  of  Coveting,  in 
the  north.  This  man  taught  them  the  art  of 
how  to  get  by  force,  fraud,  praise,  lies,  or  by 
the  guise  of  faith  ; and  these  four  squires  had 
got  much  of  the  art  of  Mr.  Gripeman,  so  that 
they  could  each  of  them  have  kept  such  a 
school  were  they  put  to  it. 

Well,  when  they,  as  I said,  did  greet  in 
turn,  Mr.  Money-love  said  to  Mr.  By-ends, 
“ Who  are  they  on  the  road  right  in  front  of 
us  ?”  for  Christian  and  Hopeful  were  yet  in 
their  view. 

By. — “They  are  a pair  from  a land  far 


I’JO 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


off,  that,  in  their  mode,  are  bent  on  a long 
route.” 

Money. — “ Ah  ! why  did  they  not  stay ; 
that  we  might  have  gone  on  with  them  ? for 
they,  and  we,  and  you,  sir,  I hope,  are  all  bent 
on  the  same  road.” 

By. — “ We  are  so,  in  sooth  : but  the  men 
in  front  of  us  are  so  harsh,  and  love  so  much 
their  own  views,  and  look  so  light  on  the 
views  of  those  who  hold  not  theirs,  that,  let  a 
man  be  as  good  as  needs  be,  yet  if  he  jumps 
not  with  them  in  all  things,  they  thrust  him 
quite  out  of  their  guild.” 

Save. — “That’s  bad  : but  we  read  of  some 
that  are  more  than  just ; and  such  men’s 
harsh  ways  cause  them  to  judge  and  spurn 
all  who  think  not  as  they  think ; but  I pray 
you  to  name  in  what  things  you  were  not  of 
one  mind.” 

By. — “ Why,  they,  in  their  fierce  mood, 
think  that  they  are  bound  to  rush  on  their 
way  at  all  times ; while  I wait  for  wind 
and  tide.  They  like  to  risk  all  for  God  at  a 
clap  ; while  I like  to  seize  all  means  to  make 
safe  my  life  and  lands.  They  fain  would  hold 


Christian  and  Hopeful. 


17] 


their  views  in  spite  of  what  men  think  ; but  I 
am  for  Faith  in  what,  and  so  far,  as  the  times 
and  my  weal  will  bear  it.  They  are  for  Faith 
when  in  rags  and  scorn  ; but  I am  for  him 
when  he  walks  in  his  sheen  shoes  in  the  sun, 
and  with  praise.” 

Hold. — “ Ay,  and  hold  you  there  still, 
good  Mr.  By-ends  : for  my  part  I can  count 
him  but  a fool,  that  with  the  means  to  keep 
what  he  has,  he  shall  be  so  lack  of  sense  as  to 
lose  it.  Let  us  be  wise  as  snakes  ; it  is  best 
‘ to  make  hay  while  the  sun  shines  you  see 
how  the  bee  lies  still  the  cold  part  of  the  year, 
and  stirs  her  but  when  she  can  have  gain  as 
well  as  joy.  God  sends  at  one  time  rain ; 
then  he  makes  the  sun  to  shine  : if  they  be 
such  fools  as  to  go  through  the  first,  yet  let 
us  rest  at  ease  in  that  we  take  a fair  wind  to 
our  backs.  For  my  part,  I like  that  faith  best 
that  will  stand  with  the  pledge  of  God’s  good 
gifts  to  us  ; for  who  can  think,  whose  mind  is 
his  rule,  since  God  doth  heap  on  us  the  good 
things  of  this  life,  but  that  he  would  have 
us  keep  them  for  his  sake?  Abraham  and 
Solomon  grew  rich  in  faith  : and  Job  says 


172 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


that  a good  man  ‘ shall  lay  up  gold  as  dust,’ 
But  he  must  not  be  such  as  the  men  in  front 
of  us,  if  they  be  as  you  have  said  of  them.” 

Save. — “ I think  that  we  are  all  of  one 
mind  in  this  thing  ; and  hence  there  need  no 
more  words  be  said  of  it.” 

Money. — “ No,  there  needs  no  more  words 
be  said  of  this  thing,  in  sooth  ; for  he  that 
puts  not  faith  in  God’s  Word  or  his  own 
mind  (and  you  see  we  have  both  on  our  side), 
knows  not  how  to  be  free,  nor  seeks  how  to 
be  safe.” 

Mr.  By-ends  and  his  friends  did  lag  and 
keep  back,  that  Christian  and  Hopeful  might 
go  on  in  front  of  them.  Then  said  Christian 
to  his  friend,  “ If  these  men  durst  not  stand 
to  hear  the  voice  of  men,  what  will  they  do 
with  the  doom  of  God  ? and  if  they  are  mute 
when  dealt  with  by  things  of  clay,  what  will 
they  do  when  fierce  fire  shall  chide  them  ?” 

Then  Christian  and  Hopeful  got  past 
them  once  more,  and  went  till  they  came  to  a 
nice  plain  known  as  Ease  ; which  did  please 
them  much  : but  that  plain  was  but  strait, 
so  they  were  soon  got  through  it.  Now  at 


Christian  and  Hopeful. 


173 


the  far  side  of  that  plain  was  a small  hill, 
which  went  by  the  name  of  Lucre,  and  in  that 
hill  a gold  mine,  which  some  of  them  that  had 
erst  been  that  way,  for  that  it  was  so  rare,  had 
gone  on  one  side  to  see ; but,  as  they  got  too 
near  the  brink  of  the  pit,  the  ground,  as  it 
was  not  sound,  broke  when  they  trod  on  it, 
and  they  were  slain  : some,  too,  had  lost  the 
use  of  their  limbs  there,  and  could  not,  till 
the  day  of  their  death,  be  the  same  men  they 
once  were. 

Then  I saw  in  my  dream  that  a short  way 
off  the  road,  nigh  to  the  gold  mine,  stood 
Demas,  a man  of  fair  looks,  to  call  to  such  as 
went  that  way  to  come  and  see  ; who  said  to 
Christian  and  his  friend,  “ Ho  ! turn  hence 
on  this  side,  and  I will  show  you  a thing.” 

Chr. — “ What  thing  of  such  worth  as  to 
turn  us  out  of  the  way  to  see  it  ?” 

Dem. — “ Here  is  a gold  mine,  and  some 
that  dig  in  it  for  wealth  : if  you  will  come, 
with  slight  pains  you  may  gain  a rich  store 
for  your  use.” 

Then  said  Hopeful,  “ Let  us  go  see.” 

“ Not  I,”  said  Christian ; “ I have  heard 


174 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


of  this  place  ere  now,  and  what  a host  have 
there  been  slain  ; and,  more  than  this,  that 
wealth  is  a snare  to  those  that  seek  it ; for  it 
stops  them  on  their  way/’ 

Then  Christian  did  call  to  Demas,  and 
said,  “ Is  not  the  way  rife  with  risks  ? Hath 
it  not  let  some  in  their  way  ?” 

Dem. — “ Not  so  much  so,  save  to  those 
that  take  no  care/’  But  a blush  came  on  his 
face  as  he  spake. 

Then  said  Christian  to  Hopeful,  “ Let  us 
not  stir  a step,  but  still  keep  on  our  way.” 

Hope. — “ I will  pledge  you  when  By-ends 
comes  up,  if  he  hath  the  same  call  as  we,  he 
will  turn  into  that  place  to  see.” 

Chr. — “No  doubt  of  it;  for  his  views 
lead  him  that  way,  and  ten  score  to  one  but 
he  dies  there.” 

Then  Demas  did  call  once  more,  and  said, 
“ But  will  you  not  come  here  and  see?” 

Then  spoke  Christian  in  this  round  style, 
and  said,  “ Demas,  thou  art  a foe  to  the  right 
ways  of  the  Lord  of  this  way,  and  hast  ere 
this  had  thy  doom  for  that  thou  didst  swerve 
on  one  side,  from  a judge  sent  by  the  King; 


Christian  and  Hopeful. 


175 


and  why  dost  thou  seek  to  bring  us  the  like 
bale  ? More  than  this,  if  we  at  all  turn  on 
one  side,  our  Lord  the  King  will  of  a truth 
hear  of  it,  and ' will  there  put  us  to  shame, 
where  we  would  stand  with  a bold  front  in 
his  sight.’" 

By  this  time  By-ends  and  those  who  were 
with  him  came  once  more  in  sight,  and  they,  at 
the  first  beck,  went  straight  to  Demas.  Now, 
that  they  fell  in  the  pit,  as  they  stood  on  the 
brink  of  it,  or  that  they  went  down  to  dig,  or 
that  they  lost  their  breath  at  the  base  by  the 
damps  that,  as  a rule,  rise  from  it,  of  these 
things  I am  not  sure  ; but  this  I saw,  that 
from  that  time  forth  they  were  not  seen  once 
more  in  the  way.  Then  sang  Christian  : — 

“ By-ends  and  gold  Demas  have  minds  the  same; 

One  calls,  the  next  runs,  that  he  may  but  share 
In  his  vile  gold.  Hence  it  is  clear  these  two 
Take  up  in  this  world,  and  then  break  their  pact’’ 

Now  I saw  that  just  on  the  far  off  side  of 
this  plain,  the  men  came  to  a place  where 
stood  an  old  pile,  hard  by  the  high  road  side, 
at  the  sight  of  which  they  both  felt  fear,  for  it 
did  seem  to  them  as  if  it  had  been  a dmne 


176 


The  Pilgrints  Progress. 


that  was  made  to  take  so  strange  a form. 
Here,  then,  they  stood,  and  did  look  and 
look  on  it,  but  could  not  for  a time  tell  what 
they  should  make  of  the  same.  At  last  Hope- 
ful saw  words  writ  high  on  the  head  of  it,  in 
a strange  hand  ; but  he,  who  knew  not  how 
to  read,  did  call  to  Christian  (who  had  that 
gift)  to  see  if  he  could  pick  out  what  they 
meant : so  he  came,  and  soon  put  the  words 
in  due  form,  when  he  found  the  same  to  be 
this,  “ Think  on  Lot’s  wife.”  So  he  read  it 
to  his  friend  ; when  they  made  up  their  minds 
that  that  was  the  pile  of  salt  which  was  once 
Lot’s  wife,  but  who  met  this  bale  for  that  she 
did  look  back  with  a heart  of  lust  as  she  went 
from  Sodom  to  get  safe  from  harm.  Which 
strange  sight  gave  them  cause  for  grave  talk. 


T77 


CHAPTER  XV. 

DOUBTING  CASTLE  AND  GIANT  DESPAIR. 

SAW  then,  that  they  went  on  their 
way  to  a fair  stream,  Now  their  way 
lay  just  by  the  bank  of  the  stream  ; 
here  then  Christian  and  his  friend  did  walk 
with  great  joy.  They  drank,  too,  of  the 
stream,  which  was  sweet  to  taste,  and  like 
balm  to  their  faint  hearts.  More  than  this, 
on  the  banks  of  this  stream,  on  each  side, 
were  green  trees  with  all  kinds  of  fruit  : 
and  the  leaves  they  ate  to  ward  off  ills 
that  come  of  too  much  food  and  heat  of 
blood,  while  on  the  way.  On  each  side 
of  the  stream  was  a mead,  bright  with 
white  plants ; and  it  was  green  all  the 
year  long.  In  this  mead  they  lay  down 
and  slept ; for  here  they  might  lie  down 
and  be  safe.  When  they  did  wake  they 
ate  of  the  fruit  of  the  trees,  and  drank 
of  the  stream,  and  then  lay  down  once 


178 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


more  to  sleep.  Thus  they  did  some  days 
and  nights. 

So  when  they  felt  a wish  to  go  on  (for 
they  were  not  as  yet  at  the  end  of  their  road) 
they  ate,  and  drank,  and  set  out. 

Now  I saw  in  my  dream,  that  they  had 
not  gone  far,  but  the  stream  and  the  way  for 
a time  were  cleft ; at  which  they  grew  sore  at 
heart ; yet  they  durst  not  go  out  of  the  way. 
Now  the  way  from  the  stream  was  rough,  and 
their  feet  soft,  for  that  they  came  a long  road  ; 
so  the  souls  of  the  men  were  sad,  from  the 
state  of  the  way.  For  this  cause  as  still  they 
went  on  they  did  wish  for  a more  sure  way. 
Now,  not  far  in  front  of  them,  there  was  on 
the  left  hand  of  the  road  a mead,  and  a stile 
to  get  right  to  it : and  that  mead  is  known  as 
By-path  Meadow.  Then  said  Christian  to  his 
friend,  “ If  this  mead  doth  lie  close  by  the  side 
of  our  way,  let  us  go  straight  to  it.”  Then  he 
went  to  the  stile  to  see,  and  lo,  a path  lay  close 
by  the  way  on  the  far  off  side  of  the  fence. 
“ It  is  just  as  I wish,”  said  Christian  ; “ go 
this  way  and  you  will  find  more  ease  ; come, 
good  Hopeful,  and  let  us  cross  to  it.” 


Doubting  Castle  and  Giant  Despair.  179 


Hope. — “ But  how  if  this  path  should 
lead  us  out  of  the  way  ?” 

“ That  is  not  like  to  be,”  said  the  next. 
“ Look,  doth  it  not  go  straight  on  by  the  side 
of  the  way?”  So  Hopeful,  when  he  thought 
on  what  his  friend  said,  went  in  his  steps,  and 
did  cross  the  stile.  When  they  were  gone 
through,  and  were  got  in  the  path,  they  found 
it  light  for  their  feet ; and  at  the  same  time, 
while  they  cast  their  eyes  in  front  of  them, 
they  saw  a man  that  did  walk  as  they  did, 
and  his  name  was  Vain-Confidence  : so  they 
did  call  to  him,  and  ask  him  to  what  place  that 
way  led.  He  said  “ To  the  Celestial  Gate.” 
“ Look,”  said  Christian,  “did  not  I tell  you 
so  ? by  this  you  may  see  we  are  right.”  So 
they  went  in  his  wake,  and  he  went  in  front 
of  them.  But,  lo,  the  night  came  on,  and  it 
grew  quite  dark ; so  that  they  that  were  in 
the  rear  lost  the  sight  of  him  that  went  in 
front. 

He  then  that  went  in  front  (Vain-Con- 
fidence by  name),  as  he  did  not  see  the  way 
clear,  fell  in  a deep  pit,  which  was  there  made 
by  the  prince  of  those  grounds  to  catch  such 


i8o 


"1  ne  Pilgrims  Progress. 


vain  fools  with  the  rest,  and  was  torn  in  bits 
by  his  fall. 

Now  Christian  and  his  friend  heard  him 
fall ; so  they  did  call  to  know  the  cause : but 
there  was  none  to  speak  ; they  but  heard  low 
groans.  Then  said  Hopeful,  “ Where  are  wc 
now  ?”  Then  was  his  friend  dumb,  for  a 
thought  came  to  his  mind  that  he  had  led  him 
out  of  the  way:  and  now  it  came  on  to  rain, 
while  flame  shot  from  the  clouds,  and  fierce 
noise  rent  the  air,  as  the  flood  rose  high. 

Then  Hopeful  gave  a deep  groan,  and 
said,  “ Oh,  that  I had  kept  on  my  way  !” 

Chr. — “Who  would  have  thought  that 
this  path  should  have  led  us  out  of  the 

T >> 

way  I 

Hope. — “ I felt  fear  of  it  at  the  first,  and 
hence,  half  by  hint,  bade  you  to  take  heed.  I 
would  have  spoke  in  a more  plain  way,  but 
that  I am  not  so  old  as  you.” 

CiiR. — “ Good  friend,  do  not  feel  hurt.  I 
grieve  I liave  brought  thee  out  of  the  way, 
and  that  I have  put  thee  in  no  slight  strait; 
pray,  my  friend,  let  this  pass ; I did  not  do  it 
of  a bad  will.” 


Doubting  Castle  and  Giant  Despair.  i8i 


Hope. — “ Be  of  good  cheer,  my  friend,  for 
I give  thee  shrift ; and  trust,  too,  this  shall  be 
for  our  good.” 

Then,  so  as  to  cheer  them,  they  heard  the 
voice  of  one  that  said,  “ Let  thine  heart  be  set 
on  the  high  road  ; and  the  way  that  thou  didst 
go  turn  once  more.”  But  by  this  time  the 
flood  rose  still  more  high,  for  which  cause  the 
way  that  they  should  go  back  was  rife  with 
risk.  Then  I thought  that  we  get  more  quick 
out  of  the  way  when  we  are  in  it,  than  in  it 
when  we  are  out.  Yet  they  strove  to  go  back  ; 
but  it  was  so  dark,  and  the  flood  was  so  high, 
that  as  they  went  back  they  were  like  to 
drown  nine  or  ten  times. 

Nor  could  they,  with  all  the  skill  they 
had,  get  once  more  to  the  stile  that  night. 
For  which  cause,  as  they  at  last  did  light 
neath  a slight  shed,  they  sat  down  there  till 
day  broke  : but  as  they  did  tire  they  fell  to 
sleep.  Now  there  was  not  far  from  the  place 
where  they  lay  a fort,  known  as  Doubting 
Castle,  and  he  who  kept  it  was  Giant  Des- 
pair : and  it  was  on  his  grounds  that  they 
now  slept.  Hence,  as  he  got  up  at  dawn, 


i82 


The  Pilgrim  s Progress. 


and  did  walk  up  and  down  in  his  fields, 
he  caught  Christian  and  Hopeful  in  sound 
sleep  on  his  grounds.  They  told  him  they 
were  poor  wights,  and  that  they  had  lost  their 
way.  Then  said  the  Giant,  “You  have  this 
night  come  where  you  should  not ; you  did 
tramp  in,  and  lie  on,  my  grounds,  and  so 
you  must  go  from  hence  with  me.  So  they 
were  made  to  go,  for  that  he  had  more 
strength  than  they.  They,  too,  had  but  few 
words  to  say,  for  they  knew  they  were  in  a 
fault.  The  Giant  hence  drove  them  in  front  of 
him,  and  put  them  in  his  fort,  in  a dank  dark 
cell,  that  was  foul  and  stunk  to  the  souls  of 
these  two  men.  Here  then  they  lay  for  full 
four  days,  and  had  not  one  bit  of  bread,  or 
drop  of  drink,  or  light,  or  one  to  ask  how 
they  did  : they  were,  hence,  here  in  bad  case, 
and  were  far  from  friends  and  all  who  knew 
them.  Now  in  this  place  Christian  had  more 
than  his  own  share  of  grief,  for  it  was  through 
his  words  that  they  were  brought  to  such 
dire  bale. 

Now  Giant  Despair  had  a wife,  and  her 
name  was  Diffidence  : so  when  he  was  gone  to 


Doubting  Castle  and  Giant  Despair.  183 

bed  he  told  his  wife  what  he  had  done  ; to 
wit,  that  he  had  caught  a pair  of  wights  and 
shut  them  up  in  a cell,  for  that  they  went  on 
^his  grounds.  Then  he  did  ask  her,  too,  what 
he  had  best  do  more  to  them.  So  she  fain 
would  know  what  they  were,  whence  they 
came,  and  to  what  place  they 'were  bound  ; 
and  he  told  her.  Then  she  said  to  him  that 
when  he  got  up  in  the  morn  he  should  beat 
them,  and  show  no  ruth.  So  when  he  rose  he 
gets  him  a huge  stick  of  crab,  and  goes  down 
to  the  cell  to  them,  and  there  at  first  falls  to 
and  rates  them  as  if  they  were  dogs,  though 
they  spoke  not  a word  to  vex  him  : then  he 
falls  on  them  and  beats  them  in  such  sort 
that  they  could  do  naught  to  ward  off  his 
blows,  or  to  turn  them  on  the  floor.  This 
done,  he  goes  off  and  leaves  them  there  to 
soothe  each  one  his  friend,  and  to  mourn  their 
grief : so  all  that  day  they  spent  the  time  in 
naught  but  sighs  and  sad  speech.  The  next 
night,  she  spoke  with  her  lord  more  as  to 
their  case,  and  when  she  found  that  they  were 
not  dead,  did  urge  him  to  tell  them  to  take 
their  own  lives.  So  when  morn  was  come  he 


184 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


goes  to  them  in  a glum  mood,  as  at  first,  and 
as  he  saw  them  to  be  quite  sore  with  the 
stripes  that  he  had  laid  on  them  the  past  day, 
he  told  them  that  since  they  were  not  like  to 
come  out  of  that  place,  their  best  way  would 
be  at  once  to  put  an  end  to  their  lives,  with 
knife,  rope,  or  drug:  “For  why,”  said  he, 
“ should  you  choose  life  as  you  see  it  is  so 
hard  to  bear?”  But  they  did  pray  him  to  let 
them  go ; with  that  he  gave  a frown  on  them, 
ran  at  them,  and  had  no  doubt  made  an  end 
of  them  with  his  own  hand,  but  that  he  fell  in 
one  of  his  fits  (for  he  at  times,  when  the  sun 
shone,  fell  in  fits),  and  lost  for  a time  the  use 
of  his  hands.  From  which  cause  he  went  off, 
and  left  them  as  he  erst  did,  to  think  what  to 
do.  Then  did  the  men  talk  of  the  best  course 
to  take  ; and  thus  they  spoke  : 

“ Friend,”  said  Christian,  “ what  shall  we 
do  ? . The  life  that  we  now  live  is  fraught 
with  ill  : for  my  part,  I know  not  if  it  be  best 
to  live  thus,  or  die  out  of  hand  : the  grave 
has  more  ease  for  me  than  this  cell.” 

Mope. — “Of  a truth,  our  state  is  most 
dread,  and  death  would  be  more  of  a boon  to 


Dotibting  Castle  and  Giant  Despair. 


185 


me  than  thus  hence  to  stay : but  yet  let  us 
think,  the  Lord  of  the  land  to  which  we 
go  hath  said,  ‘ Thou  shalt  not  kill ; ’ no,  to 
take  the  life  of  no  man ; much  more,  then, 
durst  we  not  heed  his  words  to  take  our  own 
lives  ? More  than  this,  he  that  kills  a man 
can  but  touch  his  flesh : but  for  to  kill 
one’s  self  is  to  kill  flesh  and  soul  at  once. 
The  time  may  come  that  may  set  us  free  ; but 
let  us  not  take  our  own  lives.”  With  these 
words  Hopeful  then  did  soothe  the  mind 
of  his  friend : so  they  did  stay  each  with 
each  in  the  dark  that  day,  in  their  sad  and 
drear  plight. 

Well,  as  dusk  came  on  the  Giant  goes 
down  to  the  cell  once  more,  to  see  if  those  he 
held  bound  there  had  done  as  he  had  bid 
them  : but  when  he  came  there  he  found  they 
still  did  live  ; and,  in  sooth,  live  did  all.  For 
now,  what  for  want  of  bread  and  drink,  and 
for  that  of  the  wounds  they  got  when  he  beat 
them,  they  could  scarce  do  aught  but  breathe. 
But,  I say,  he  found  that  each  did  live ; at 
which  he  fell  in  a great  rage,  and  told  them 
that,  as  he  sav/  they  had  lent  a deaf  ear  to 


1 86  The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 

what  he  had  said,  it  should  be  worse  with 
them  than  if  they  had  not  been  born. 

At  this  they  shook  with  dread,  and  I think 
that  Christian  fell  in  a swoon  ; but  as  he  came 
round  once  more,  they  took  up  the  same 
strain  of  speech  as  to  the  Giant’s  words, 
and  if  it  were  best  give  heed  to  them  or  no. 
Now  Christian  once  more  did  seem  to  wish  to 
yield,  but  Hopeful  made  his  next  speech  in 
this  wise : 

“My  friend,”  said  he,  “dost  thou  not 
know  how  brave  thou  hast  been  in  times 
past  ? The  foul  fiend  could  not  crush  thee ; 
nor  could  all  that  thou  didst  hear,  or  see,  or 
feel  in  the  Vale  of  the  Shade  of  Death  ; what 
wear  and  tear,  grief  and  fright,  hast  thou 
erst  gone  through,  and  art  thou  now  naught 
but  fears  ? Thou  dost  see  that  I am  in  the  cell 
with  thee,  and  I am  a far  more  weak  man  to 
look  at  than  thou  art  : in  like  way,  this  Giant 
did  wound  me  as  well  as  thee,  and  hath,  too, 
cut  off  the  bread  and  drink  from  my  mouth, 
and  with  thee  I mourn  void  of  the  light.  But 
let  us  try  and  grow  more  strong : call  to  mind 
how  thou  didst  play  the  man  at  Vanity  Fair, 


Doubting  Castle  and  Giant  Despair.  187 


and  wast  not  made  blench  at  the  chain  or 
cage,  nor  yet  at  fierce  death  ; for  which  cause 
let  us,  at  least  to  shun  the  shame  that  looks 
not  well  for  a child  of  God  to  be  found  in, 
bear  up  with  calm  strength  as  well  as 
we  can.” 

Now  night  had  come  once  more,  and  the 
Giant  and  his  wife  were  in  bed  ; when  she 
spoke  to  him  of  the  men,  and  sought  to  know 
if  they  had  done  as  he  had  told  them.  To 
which  he  said,  “ They  are  stout  rogues  ; they 
choose  the  more  to  bear  all  hard  things  than 
to  put  an  end  to  their  lives.”  Then  said  she, 
“Take  them  to  the  garth  next  day,  and  show 
them  the  bones  and  skulls  of  those  that  thou 
hast  erst  put  to  death,  and  make  them  think, 
ere  a week  comes  to  an  end,  thou  wilt  tear 
them  in  shreds,  as  thou  hast  done  to  folk  like 
to  them.” 

So  when  the  morn  was  come  the  Giant 
goes  to  them  once  more,  and  takes  them  to 
the  garth,  and  shows  them  as  his  wife  had 
bade  him  ; “ These,”  said  he,  “ were  wights, 
as  you  are,  once,  and  they  trod  on  my  grounds, 
as  you  have  done  ; and  when  I thought  fit  I 


i88 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 

tore  them  in  bits,  and  so  in  the  space  of  ten 
days  I will  do  you  : go,  get  you  down  to  your 
den  once  more.”  And  with  that  he  beat  them 
all  the  way  to  the  place.  They  lay  for  this 
cause  all  day  in  a sad  state,  just  as  they  had 
done.  Now,  when  night  was  come,  and  when 
Mrs.  Diffidence  and  her  spouse  the  Giant 
were  got  to  bed,  they  once  more  spoke  of 
the  men  ; and,  with  this,  the  Giant  thought 
it  strange  that  he  could  not  by  his  blows  or 
words  bring  them  to  an  end.  And  with 
that  his  wife  said,  “ I fear  that  they  live 
in  hopes  that  some  will  come  to  set  them 
free,  or  that  they  have  things  to  pick  locks 
with  them,  by  the  means  of  which  they  hope 
to  scape.”  “And  dost  thou  say  so,  my  dear?” 
said  the  Giant ; “ I will  hence  search  them  in 
the  morn.” 

Well,  in  the  depth  of  night  they  strove 
hard  to  pray,  and  held  it  up  till  just  break 
of  day. 

Now,  not  long  ere  it  was  day,  good  Chris- 
tian, as  one  half  wild,  brake  out  in  this  hot 
speech  : “ What  a fool,”  quoth  he,  “ am  I, 
thus  to  lie  in  a foul  den  when  I may  as 


Doubting  Castle  and  Giant  Despair. 


189 


well  walk  in  the  free  air  : I have  a key  in  my 
breast  known  as  Promise,  that  will,  I feel 
sure,  pick  each  lock  in  Doubting  Castle.” 
Then  said  Hopeful,  “ That  is  good  news,  my 
friend  ; pluck  it  out  of  thy  breast  and  try.” 

Then  Christian  took  it  out  of  his  breast, 
and  did  try  at  the  cell  door,  whose  bolt  as  he 
did  turn  the  key  gave  back,  and  the  door  flew 
back  with  ease,  and  Christian  and  Hopeful 
both  came  out.  Then  he  went  to  the  front 
door  that  leads  to  the  yard  of  the  fort,  and 
with  this  key  did  ope  that  door  in  like  way. 
Then  he  went  to  the  brass  gate  (for  that  he 
must  ope  too),  but  that  lock  he  had  hard  work 
to  move  ; yet  did  the  key  pick  it.  Then  they 
thrust  wide  the  gate  to  make  their  scape  with 
speed.  But  that  gate  as  it  went  back  did 
creak  so,  that  it  woke  Giant  Despair,  who,  as 
he  rose  in  haste  to  go  in  search  of  the  men, 
felt  his  limbs  to  fail,  for  his  fits  took  him 
once  more,  so  that  he  could  by  no  means  go 
in  their  track.  Then  they  went  on,  and  came 
to  the  King’s  high  road  once  more,  and  so 
were  safe,  for  that  they  were  out  of  his 
grounds. 


1 90  The  Pilgrims  Progress. 

Now,  when  they  had  got  clear  of  the  stile, 
they  thought  in  their  minds  what  they  should 
do  at  that  stile,  to  keep  those  that  should  come 
in  their  wake  from  the  fell  hands  of  Giant 
Despair.  So  they  built  there  a pile  and 
wrote  on  the  side  of  it  these  words:  “To 
cross  this  stile  is  the  way  to  Doubting  Castle, 
which  is  kept  by  Giant  Despair,  who  spurns 
the  King  of  the  good  land,  and  seeks  to  kill 
such  as  serve  him.”  A host  hence  that 
came  this  way  when  they  read  what  was 
writ,  got  safe.  This  done,  they  sang  in  this 
wise  : — 

Out  of  the  way  we  went,  and  then  we  found 
What  ’twas  to  tread  on  ground  we  should  not  touch ; 

And  let  them  that  come  in  our  track  take  care 
Lest  want  of  thought  makes  them  to  fare  as  we ; 

Lest  they,  from  their  false  steps,  grow  his  fell  foes, 

Whose  Castle’s  Doubting,  whose  name  is  Despair.” 


CHAPTER  XVI. 


THE  DELECTABLE  MOUNTAINS. 

HEY  went  then  till  they  came  to  the 
Delectable  Mountains,  which  mounts 
the  Lord  of  that  hill  doth  own  of 
whom  we  erst  did  speak  : so  they  went  up  to 
the  mounts,  to  see  the  plants,  trees  rife  with 
fruit,  the  vines  and  founts ; where,  too,  they 
drank,  did  wash,  and  eat  of  the  grapes  till  no 
gust  was  left  for  more.  Now  there  were  on 
the  top  of  these  mounts.  Shepherds  that  fed 
their  flocks,  and  they  stood  by  the  side  of  the 
high  road.  Christian  and  Hopeful  then  went 
to  them,  and  while  they  leant  on  their  staves 
(as  is  the  case  with  wights  who  tme  when  they 
stand  to  talk  with  folk  by  the  way),  they  said, 
“ Whose  Delectable  Mountains  are  these  ? 
and  whose  be  the  sheep  that  feed  on  them  ?” 

Shep. — “ These  mounts  are  Immanuel’s 
Land,  and  they  can  be  seen  from  this  town : 
and  the  sheep  in  like  way  are  his,  and  he  laid 
down  his  life  for  them.” 


192  The  Pilgrims  Progress. 

Chr. — “ Is  this  the  way  to  the  Celestial 
City  ?” 

Shep. — “ You  are  just  in  your  way.” 

I saw,  too,  in  my  dream  that  when  the 
Shepherds  saw  that  they  were  men  on  the 
road,  they  in  like  way  did  ask  them  things, 
to  which  they  spoke,  as  was  their  wont : as, 
“ Whence  came  you  ? and  how  got  you  in  the 
way  ? and  by  what  means  have  you  so  held  on 
in  it  ? for  but  few  of  them  that  set  out  to  come 
hence  do  show  their  face  on  these  mounts,” 
But  when  the  Shepherds  heard  their  speech, 
which  did  please  them,  they  gave  them  looks 
of  love,  and  said,  ” Good  come  with  thee  to 
the  Mounts  of  Joy.” 

The  Shepherds,  I say,  whose  names 
were  Knowledge,  Experience,  Watchful,  and 
Sincere,  took  them  by  the  hand  and  had 
them  to  their  tents,  and  made  them  eat 
and  drink  of  that  which  was  there  at  the 
time.  They  said,  too,  “We  would  that  you 
should  stay  here  a short  time,  to  get  known 
to  us,  and  yet  more  to  cheer  your  heart  with 
the  good  of  these  Mounts  of  Joy.”  They  told 
them  that  they  would  much  like  to  stay ; and 


TIte  Delectable  Mountains. 


193 


so  they  went  to  their  rest  that  night,  for  that 
it  was  so  late 

Then  I saw  in  my  dream,  that  in  the 
morn  the  Shepherds  did  call  on  Christian 
and  Hopeful  to  walk  with  them  on  the 
mounts : so  they  went  forth  with  them, 
and  did  walk  a while,  as  the  view  grew 
fair  and  more  fair  on  each  side.  Then  said 
the  Shepherds,  each  to  his  friend,  “ Shall  we 
show  these  wights  with  staves  some  strange 
sights?”  So  when  they  had  made  up  their 
minds  to  do  it,  they  had  them  first  to  the  top 
of  a hill,  known  as  Error,  which  was  most 
steep  on  the  far  off  side,  and  bid  them  look 
down  to  the  base.  So  Christian  and  Hopeful 
did  look  down,  and  saw  at  the  foot  a lot  of 
men  rent  all  to  bits,  by  a fall  that  they  had 
from  the  top.  Then  said  Christian,  “ What 
doth  this  mean?”  The  Shepherds  said,  “ Have 
you  not  heard  of  them  that  were  made  to  err, 
in  that  they  gave  heed  to  Hymeneus  and 
Philetus,  who  held  not  the  faith  that  the  dead 
shall  rise  from  the  grave  ?”  They  said,  “ Yes.” 
Then  said  the  Shepherds,  “ Those  that  you 
see  lie  rent  in  bits  at  the  base  of  this  mount 


194 


The  Pilgrinis  Progress. 


are  they  ; and  they  have  lain  to  this  day  on 
the  ground  as  you  see,  so  that  those  who 
come  this  way  may  take  heed  how  they  climb 
too  high,  or  how  they  come  too  near  the  brink 
of  this  mount.” 

Then  I saw  that  they  had  them  to  the  top 
of  the  next  mount,  and  the  name  of  that  is 
Caution,  and  bid  them  look  as  far  off  as  they 
could  ; which  when  they  did  they  saw,  as  they 
thought,  a group  of  men  that  did  walk  up  and 
down  through  the  tombs  that  were  there  : and 
they  saw  that  the  men  were  blind,  for  that 
they  fell  at  times  on  the  tombs,  and  for  that 
they  could  not  get  out  from  the  midst  of  them. 
Then  said  Christian,  “What  means  this?” 

The  Shepherds  then  said,  “ Did  you  not 
see,  a short  way  down  these  mounts,  a stile 
that  leads  to  a mead  on  the  left  hand  of  this 
way?”  They  said,  “Yes.”  Then  said  the 
Shepherds,  “ From  that  stile  there  goes  a 
path  that  leads  straight  to  Doubting  Castle, 
which  is  kept  by  Giant  Despair;  and  these 
men  (as  he  did  point  to  them  in  the  midst  of 
the  tombs)  came  once  on  the  way,  as  you  do 
now — ay,  till  they  came  to  that  same  stile! 


The  Delectable  Mountains. 


195 


And  as  they  found  the  right  way  was  rough 
in  that  place,  they  chose  to  go  out  of  it  to 
that  mead,  and  there  were  caught  by  Giant 
Despair  and  shut  up  in  Doubting  Castle ; 
where,  when  they  had  a while  been  kept  in 
a cell,  he  at  last  did  put  out  their  eyes,  and 
led  them  in  the  thick  of  those  tombs,  where 
he  has  left  them  to  stray  till  this  day  : that 
the  words  of  the  Wise  Man  might  be  brought 
to  pass,  ‘ He  that  strays  out  of  the  way  of 
truth  shall  dwell  in  the  homes  of  the  dead.’  ” 
Then  did  Christian  and  Hopeful  look  each  on 
each,  while  tears  came  from  their  eyes  ; but 
yet  said  they  not  a word  to  the  Shepherds. 

Then  I saw  in  my  dream,  that  the  Shep- 
herds had  them  to  one  more  place,  in  a steep, 
where  was  a door  in  the  side  of  a hill ; and  they 
flung  wide  the  door  and  bid  them  look  in. 
They  did  look  in,  hence,  and  saw  that  it  was 
dark  and  full  of  smoke;  they  thought,  too, 
that  they  heard  a hoarse  noise,  as  of  fire,  and 
a cry  of  some  in  pain  ; and  that  they  smelt 
a dread  scent.  Then  said  Christian,  “What 
means  this  ?”  The  Shepherds  told  them, 
“ This  is  a nigh  way  to  Hell ; a way  that  such 


196 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


as  seem  to  be  what  they  are  not  go  in  at : to 
wit,  such  as  sell  the  right  they  had  at  birth, 
with  Esau  ; such  as  sell  their  Lord,  with 
Judas;  such  as  speak  ill  of  God’s  Word, 
with  Alexander ; and  that  lie  and  shift,  with 
Ananias,  and  Sapphira  his  wife.”- 

Then  said  Hopeful  to  the  Shepherds,  “ I 
see  that  these  had  on  them,  each  one,  a show 
of  the  road,  as  we  have  now,  had  they  not  ?” 

Shep. — “ Yes,  and  held  it  a long  time 
too.” 

Hope. — “ How  far  might  they  go  on  in 
the  way,  in  their  days,  since  they,  in  spite  of 
this,  were  thus  cast  off?” 

Shep. — “ Some  yon,  and  some  not  so  far 
as  these  mounts.” 

By  this  tim.e  Christian  and  Hopeful  had 
a wish  to  go  forth,  and  the  Shepherds  meant 
that  they  should  ; so  they  sped  side  by  side 
till  they  got  nigh  the  end  of  the  mounts. 
Then  said  the  Shepherds,  each  to  his  friend, 
“ Let  us  here  show  these  wights  the  gates  of 
the  Celestial  City,  if  they  have  skill  to  look 
through  Our  kind  of  glass.”  The  men  then 
did  like  the  hint : so  they  had  them  to  the 


The  Delectable  Mountains. 


197 


top  of  a high  hill,  the  name  of  which  was 
Clear,  and  gave  them  the  glass  to  look. 

Then  did  they  try  to  look,  but  the  thought 
of  that  last  thing  that  the  Shepherds  had 
shown  them  made  their  hands  shake ; by 
means  of  which  let  they  could  not  look  well 
through  the  glass  ; yet  they  thought  they  saw 
a thing  like  the  gate,  and,  in  like  way,  some 
of  the  sheen  of  the  place.  Then  they  went  off, 
and  sang  this  song : — 

“ Thus  by  the  Shepherds  strange  sights  are  made  clear, 

The  which  from  all  men  else  are  kept  fast  hid  : 

Come  to  the  Shepherds,  then,  if  you  would  see 
Things  deep,  things  hid,  and  things  full  fraught  with  awe." 

Just  ere  they  set  out,  one  of  the  Shepherds 
gave  them  a note  of  the  way ; the  next  bid 
them  take  heed  of  such  as  fawn;  the  third 
bid  them  take  heed  that  they  slept  not  on 
ground  that  had  a spell;  and  the  fourth 
bid  them  God  speed.  So  I did  wake  from 
my  dream. 


198 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

THE  ENCHANTED  GROUND  AND  THE  WAY  DOWN  TO  IT. 

ND  I slept  and  dreamt  once  more, 
and  saw  the  same  two  wights  go 
down  the  mounts,  by  the  high  road 
that  led  to  the  town.  Now  nigh  the  base  of 
these  mounts,  on  the  left  hand,  lies  the  land 
of  Conceit,  from  which  land  there  comes, 
right  in  the  way  in  which  the  men  trod,  a 
small  lane  with  twists  and  turns.  Here, 
then,  they  met  with  a brisk  lad  that  came 
out  of  that  land,  and  his  name  was  Ignorance. 
So  Christian  would  know  from  what  parts  he 
came,  and  whence  he  was  bound. 

Ignor. — “ Sir,  I was  born  in  the  land  that 
lies  off  there  a short  way  on  the  left  hand,  and 
I am  bound  to  the  Celestial  City.” 

Chr. — “ But  how  do  you  think  to  get 
in  at  the  gate  ? for  you  may  find  some  let 
there.” 

“ As  some  good  folk  do,”  said  he. 

CiiR. — “ But  what  have  you  to  show  at 


The  Enchanted  Ground. 


199 


that  gate,  that  the  gate  should  be  flung  wide 
to  you  ?” 

Ignor. — “ I know  my  Lord’s  will,  and 
have  led  a good  life  ; I pay  each  man  his 
own  ; I pray,  fast,  pay  tithes,  and  give  alms  ; 
and  have  left  my  land  for  the  place  to  which 
I go.” 

Chr. — “ But  thou  didst  not  come  in  at 
the  Wicket-gate  that  is  at  the  head  of  this 
way ; thou  didst  come  in  here  through  that 
same  lane  with  the  twists  and  turns ; and 
hence,  I fear,  in  spite  of  what  thou  dost  think 
of  thy  right,  when  the  last  day  shall  come, 
thou  wilt  have  laid  to  thy  charge  that  thou  art 
a thief,  in  lieu  of  a free  pass  to  the  town.” 

Ignor. — “ Sirs,  ye  be  not  known  to  me  in 
the  least ; I know  you  not ; you  be  led  by  the 
faith  of  your  land,  and  I will  be  led  by  the 
faith  of  mine.  I hope  all  will  be  well.  And 
as  for  the  gate  that  you  talk  of,  all  the  world 
knows  that  that  is  a great  way  off  our  land. 
I do  not  think  that  one  man  in  all  our  parts 
doth  so  much  as  know  the  way  to  it ; nor 
need  they  care  if  they  do  or  no  ; since  we 
have,  as  you  see,  a fine,  gay,  green  lane,  that 


200 


The  Pilgrim! s Progress. 


comes  down  from  our  land,  the  next  road  that 
leads  to  the  way.” 

When  Christian  saw  that  the  man  was 
wise  in  his  own  eyes,  he  said  to  Hopeful  in 
a soft  voice,  “ ‘ There  is  more  hope  of  a fool 
than  of  him  ” and  said,  in  like  way,  “ ‘When 
he  that  is  a fool  walks  by  the  way,  his  sense 
fails  him,  and  he  saith  to  each  one  that  he  is 
a fool.’  What  1 shall  we  talk  more  with  him, 
or  move  on  now,  and  so  leave  him  to  think  of 
what  he  hath  erst  heard,  and  then  stop  once 
more  for  him  in  a while,  and  see  if  by  slow 
steps  we  can  do  aught  of  good  to  him  ?” 
Then  said  Faithful,  “ It  is  not  good,  I think, 
to  say  so  to  him  all  at  once  ; let  us  pass  him 
by,  if  you  will,  and  talk  to  him  by  and  by, 
just  as  he  has  ‘ strength  to  bear  it.’  ” 

So  they  both  went  on,  and  Ignorance 
came  in  their  track.  Now,  when  they  had 
left  him  a short  way,  they  came  to  a dark 
lane,  where  they  met  a man  whom  some 
fiends  had  bound  with  strong  cords,  and  took 
back  to  the  door  that  they  saw  on  the  side  of 
the  hill.  Now  good  Christian  could  not  help 
but  shake,  and  so  did  Hopeful,  who  was  with 


The  Enchanted  Ground. 


201 


him  ; yet,  as  the  fiends  led  off  the  man, 
Christian  did  look  to  see  if  he  knew  him ; 
and  he  thought  it  might  be  one  Turnaway, 
that  dwelt  in  the  town  of  Apostacy.  But  he 
did  not  well  see  his  face,  for  he  did  hang  his 
head  like  a thief  that  is  found.  But  when  he 
had  gone  past.  Hopeful  gave  a look  at  him, 
and  saw  on  his  back  a card,  with  these 
words,  “ Vile  cheat,  that  has  left  his  faith.” 

So  they  went  on,  and  Ignorance  went  in 
their  track.  They  went  till  they  came  at  a 
place  where  they  saw  a way  put  right  in  their 
way,  and  did  seem,  at  the  same  time,  to  lie 
as  straight  as  the  way  which  they  should  go. 
And  here  they  knew  not  which  of  the  two 
to  take,  for  both  did  seem  straight  in  front 
of  them  : hence  they  stood  to  think.  And  as 
they  thought  of  the  way,  lo,  a man  black  of 
flesh,  but  clad  with  a light  robe,  came  to 
them,  and  did  ask  them  why  they  stood  there. 
They  said  they  were  bound  to  the  Celestial 
City,  but  knew  not  which  of  these  ways  to 
take.  “ Go  with  me,”  said  the  man  ; “ it  is  to 
that  place  I am  bent.”  So  they  went  with 
him  in  the  way  that  but  now  came  to  the  road, 


202 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 

which  each  step  they  took  did  turn  and  turn 
them  so  far  from  the  town  that  they  sought 
to  go  to,  that  in  a short  time  their  heads  did 
turn  off  from  it ; yet  they  went  with  him. 
But  by  and  by,  ere  they  well  knew  of  it,  he 
led  them  both  in  the  bounds  of  a net,  in  which 
they  were  both  so  caught  that  they  knew  not 
what  to  do  ; and  with  that  the  white  robe  fell 
off  the  black  man’s  back  : then  they  saw  where 
they  were.  For  which  cause  there  they  lay  in 
tears  some  time,  for  they  could  not  get  their 
limbs  out. 

Then  said  Christian  to  his  friend,  “ Now 
do  I see  that  I am  wrong.  Did  not  the 
Shepherds  bid  us  take  heed  of  the  Flatterer? 
As  are  the  words  of  the  Wise  Man,  so  we 
have  found  it  this  day,  ‘ A man  that  fawns 
on  his  friend  spreads  a net  for  his  feet.’  ” 

Hope. — “ They,  too,  gave  us  some  notes 
as  to  the  way,  so  that  we  may  be  the  more 
sure  to  find  it ; but  in  that  we  have  not 
thought  to  read.” 

I'hus  they  lay  in  sad  plight  in  the  net. 
At  last  they  saw  a Bright  One  come  nigh  to 
where  they  were,  with  a whip  of  small  cords 


The  Enchanted  Groimd. 


203 

in  his  hand.  When  he  was  come  to  the  place 
where  they  were,  he  did  ask  them  whence  they 
came,  and  what  they  did  there?  They  told 
him  they  were  poor  wights  bound  to  Zion, 
but  were  led  out  of  their  way  by  a black  man 
clad  in  white,  “who  bid  us,”  said  they,  “go 
with  him,  for  he  was  bound  to  that  place 
too.”  Then  said  he  with  the  whip,  “ It  is 
one  who  fawns,  a false  guide  who  wore  the 
garb  of  a sprite  of  light.”  So  he  rent  the  net, 
and  let  the  men  out.  Then  said  he  to  them, 
‘^Come  with  me,  that  I may  set  you  in  your 
way  once  more  so  he  led  them  back  to  the 
way  they  had  left  to  go  with  the  Flatterer. 
Then  he  did  ask  them  and  said,  “ Where  did 
you  lie  the  last  night?”  They  said,  “With 
the  Shepherds  on  the  Mounts  of  Joy.”  He 
did  ask,  then,  if  they  had  not  of  -those  men 
a note  as  a guide  for  the  way.  They  said, 
“ Yes.”  “ But  did  you  not,”  said  he,  “ when 
you  were  at  a stand,  pluck  out  and  read  yuur 
note?”  Quoth  they,  “No.”  He  did  ask 
them,  “Why?”  They  said,  “They  did  not 
think  of  it.”  He  would  know,  too,  “ If  the 
Shepherds  did  not  bid  them  take  heed  of  the 


204 


The  Pilgrim  s Progress. 


Flatterer?”  They  said,  “Yes;  but  we  thought 
not,”  said  they,  “ that  this  man  of  fine  speech 
had  been  he.” 

Then  I saw  in  my  dream  that  he  told 
them  to  lie  down  ; which  when  they  did,  he 
gave  them  sore  stripes,  to  teach  them  the 
good  way  in  which  they  should  walk.  This 
done,  he  bids  them  go  on  their  way,  and  take 
good  heed  to  the  next  hints  of  the  Shepherds. 
So  they  fain  would  thank  him  for  all  his 
ruth,  and  went  with  light  tread  by  the  right 
way. 

Now  in  a while  they  saw,  a good  way  off, 
one  that  came,  with  soft  steps  and  none  with 
him,  by  the  high  road  to  meet  them.  Then 
said  Christian  to  his  friend,  “Yon  is  a man 
that  doth  turn  his  back  on  Zion,  and  he  comes 
to  meet  us.” 

Hope. — “I  see  him  : let  us  take  good  heed 
now,  lest  he  should  prove  a Flatterer  too.” 

So  he  drew  more  near,  and  at  last  came 
up  to  them.  His  name  was  Atheist;  and 
he  did  ask  them  to  what  place  they  were 
bound  ? 

CiiR. — “We  are  bound  to  Mount  Zion.” 


The  Enchanted  Ground. 


205 


Then  Atheist  did  laugh  till  his  sides  all 
but  split. 

Chr. — “ What  do  you  mean  by  this  wild 
burst?” 

Ath. — “ I laugh  to  see  what  dull  dolts  you 
are,  to  take  on  you  to  trudge  so  long  a way  ; 
and  yet  are  like  to  have  naught  but  your  toil 
for  your  pains.” 

Chr. — “ Why,  man  I do  you  think  we 
shall  not  be  let  in  ?” 

Ath. — “ Let  in  ! there  is  not  such  a place 
as  you  dream  of  in  all  this  world.” 

Then  said  Christian  to  Hopeful  his  friend, 
“ Is  it  true  which  this  man  hath  said  ?” 

Hope. — “Take  heed,  he  is  one  of  the 
Flatterers  : but  think  what  it  hath  cost  us  up 
- to  this  time  for  that  we  did  list  to  such  kind 
of  cheats.  What ! no  Mount  Zion  ! Did  we 
not  see  from  the  Delectable  Mountains  the 
gate  of  the  City  ? Then,  are  'we  not  to  walk 
by  faith?  Let  us  go  on,  lest  the  man  whh 
the  whip  get  up  with  us  once  more  You 
should  have  taught  me  that  rule  which  I will 
round  you  in  the  ears  at  the  same  time : 
‘ Cease,  my  son,  to  hear  the  rules  that  do 


2o6 


' TJie  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


cause  to  err  from  the  words  of  truth  I say, 
my  friend,  cease  to  hear  him,  and  let  us  have 
faith  such  as  to  save  the  soul.” 

I then  saw  in  my  dream,  that  they  went 
on  till  they  came  to  a land  whose  air  did  tend 
to  make  one  sleep,  if  he  had  erst  not  been  to 
it.  And  here  Hopeful  grew  quite  dull  and 
nigh  fell  to  sleep  : for  which  cause  he  said  to 
Christian,  “ I do  now  grow  so  dull  that  I can 
scarce  hold  ope  mine  eyes  ; let  us  lie  down 
here,  and  take  one  nap.” 

“ By  no  means,”  said  Christian,  “ lest  if 
we  sleep  we  wake  not  more.” 

Hope. — “Why,  my  friend?  sleep  is  sweet 
to  the  man  that  toils  : it  may  give  us  strength 
if  we  take  a nap.” 

Chr. — “ Do  you  not  know  that  one  of  the 
Shepherds  bid  us  take  heed  of  the  Enchanted 
Ground  ? He  meant  by  that,  that  we  should 
take  care  and  not  go  to  sleep.  ‘ Let  us  not 
sleep,  as  do  some  ; but  let  us  watch  and  be  of 
sound  mind.’” 

Hope. — “ I know  I am  in  fault;  and,  had 
not  you  been  with  me  here,  I had  gone  to 


The  Enchanted  Ground. 


207 

true  that  the  Wise  Man  saith,  ‘ Two  are  more 
good  than  one.’  Up  to  this*  time  thou  hast 
been  my  ruth  ; and  thou  shalt  ‘ have  a good 
meed  for  thy  pains.’  ” 

I saw  then  in  my  dream,  that  Hopeful 
gave  a look  back,  and  saw  Ignorance,  whom 
they  had  left  in  their  wake,  come  in  their 
track.  “ Look,”  said  he  to  Christian,  “ how 
far  yon  youth  doth  lag  in  the  rear.” 

Chr. — “ Ay,  ay,  I see  him  ; he  cares  not 
to  be  with  us.” 

Hope. — But  I trow  it  would  not  have 
hurt  him  had  he  kept  pace  with  us  to  this 
time.” 

Chr. — ■“  That  is  true  : but  I wot  he  doth 
not  think  so.” 

Hope. — “That  I think  he  doth  : but,  be  it 
so  or  no,  let  us  wait  for  him.”  So  they  did. 

Then  Christian  did  call  to  him,  “ Come 
you  on,  man  : why  do  you  stay  back  so  ?” 

Ignor. — “ I like  to  walk  in  this  lone  way  ; 
ay,  more  a great  deal  than  with  folk  : that  is, 
save  I like  them  much.” 

Then  said  Christian  to  Hopeful  (but  in  a 
soft  voice),  “ Did  I not  tell  you  he  sought  to 


2o8 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


shirk  us?  But,  be  this  as  it  may,  come  up, 
and  let  us  talk  off  the  time  in  this  lone 
place.” 

Then,  when  he  had  a long  speech  with 
Ignorance,  Christian  spoke  thus  to  his  friend, 
“Weil,  come,  my  good  Hopeful,  I see  that 
thou  and  I must  walk  side  by  side  once 
more.” 

So  I saw  in  my  dream  that  they  went  on 
fast  in  front,  and  Ignorance,  he  came  with 
lame  gait  in  their  track.  Then  said  Christian 
to  his  friend,  “ I feel  much  for  this  poor  man  : 
it  will  of  a truth  go  hard  with  him  at  last.” 


209 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

THE  LAND  OF  BEULAH — THE  FORDS  OF  THE  RIVER — 
AT  HOME. 

OW  I saw  in  my  dream  that  by  this 
time  the  wights  had  got  clear  of  the 
Enchanted  Ground  ; and  had  come 
land  of  Beulah,  whose  air  was  most 
sweet : as  the  way  did  lie  straight  through  it, 
they  took  rest  there  for  a while.  Yea,  here 
they  heard  at  all  times  “ the  songs  of  birds,” 
and  saw  each  day  the  plants  bud  forth  in  the 
earth,  and  heard  “ the  voice  of  the  dove”  in 
the  land.  In  this  realm  the  sun  shines  night 
and  day : for  this  was  far  from  the  Vale  of 
the  Shade  of  Death,  and,  in  like  way,  out  of 
the  reach  of  Giant  Despair ; nor  could  the]^ 
from  this  place  so  much  as  see  Doubting 
Castle.  Here  they  were  in  sight  of  the  City 
to  which  they  were  bound  : here,  too,  met 
them  some  of  the  folk  who  dwelt  there : for 
in  this  land  the  Bright  Ones  did  walk,  for 
that  it  was  on  the  verge  of  bliss.  In  this 


210 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


land,  too,  the  pact  made  by  the  Bride  and  the 
Bride-groom  was  made  more  firm.  Here  they 
had  no  want  of  corn  and  wine ; for  in  this 
place  they  met  with  all  that  they  had  sought 
for  in  all  their  way. 

Now  as  they  did  walk  in  this  land  they 
had  more  joy  than  in  parts  not  so  nigh  the 
realm  to  which  they  were  bound  : and  as  they 
drew  near  the  City  they  had  yet  a more  clear 
view  of  it.  It  was  built  of  pearls  and  rare 
gems  : its  streets,  too,  were  of  gold  : so  that, 
from  the  sheen  of  the  place,  and  the  glow  of 
the  sun  on  it,  Christian  did  long  so  much 
that  he  fell  sick.  Hopeful,  in  like  way,  had 
a fit  or  two  of  the  same  kind.  For  which 
cause  they  lay  by  for  a space,  and  did  cry 
out  for  that  of  their  pangs  ; “ If  ye  see  Him 
I seek,  tell  him  that  I am  sick  of  love.” 

But  when  they  got  some  strength,  and 
could  bear  their  sick  state,  they  went  on  their 
way,  and  came  near  and  yet  more  near  where 
were  grounds  that  bore  fruits,  vines,  and 
plants ; and  their  gates  did  ope  on  the  high 
road.  Now,  as  they  came  up  to  these  parts, 
lo,  the  (iardener  stood  in  the  way ; to  whom 


The  Land  of  Beulah. 


211 


the  men  said,  “Whose  fine  vine  and  fruit 
grounds  are  these  ?”  He  said,  “ They  are 
the  Kings,  and  are  put  there  for  his  own  joy, 
as  well  as  to  cheer  such  as  come  this  way.” 
So  he  took  them  to  where  the  vines  grew,  and 
bid  them  wet  their  mouths  with  the  fruit : he, 
too,  did  show  them  there  the  King^s  walks, 
and  the  shades  that  he  sought ; and  here  they 
staid  and  slept. 

Now  I saw  in  my  dream  that  they  spoke 
more  in  their  sleep  at  this  time  than  erst  they 
did  in  all  their  way:  and  as  I did  muse  on  it, 
the  Gardener  said  to  me,  “ Why  dost  thou 
muse  at  this?  It  is  a charm  in  the  fruit  of 
the  grapes  of  these  grounds  ‘ to  go  down  in  so 
sweet  a way  as  to  cause  the  lips  of  them  that 
sleep  to  speak.’  ” 

So  I saw  that  when  they  did  wake  they 
girt  up  their  loins  to  go  up  to  the  City.  But, 
as  I said,  the  glow  of  the  sun  on  the  City  (for 
the  City  was  of  pure  gold)  was  so  great  that 
they  could  not  as  yet  look  on  it  with  full 
face,  but  through  a glass  made  for  that 
use.  So  1 saw  that,  as  they  went  on,  there 
met  them  two  men  in  robes  that  shone 


2 I 2 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


like  gold,  while  the  face  of  each  was  bright 
as  the  light. 

These  men  did  ask  them  whence  they 
came ; and  they  told  them.  They  would 
know,  too,  where  they  did  lodge,  and  what 
straits  and  risks  and  joys  they  had  met  with 
in  the  way ; and  they  told  them.  Then  said 
the  men  that  met  them,  “ You  have  but  two 
straits  more  to  meet  with,  and  then  you  are 
in  the  City.” 

Christian  then,  and  his  friend,  did  ask 
the  men  to  go  with  them : so  they  told  them 
'.hat  they  would ; but  said  they,  “You  must 
^ain  it  by  your  own  faith.”  So  I saw  in  my 
dream  that  they  went  on  each  with  each,  till 
they  came  in  sight  of  the  gate. 

Now  I saw  still  more,  that  a stream  ran 
in  front  of  them  and  the  gate ; but  there  was 
no  bridge  to  cross,  and  the  stream  was  deep. 
At  the  sight  of  this  stream,  the  wights  with 
staves  took  fright ; but  the  men  that  went 
with  them  said,  “ Thou  must  go  through,  or 
thou  canst  not  come  at  the  gate.” 

d'he  wights  then  sought  to  know  if  there 
was  no  way  but  that  to  the  gate.  To  which 


The  Land  of  Beulah. 


213 


they  said,  “ Yes  ; but  none,  save  two — to  wit, 
Enoch  and  Elijah — hath  been  let  to  tread 
that  path  since  the  world  was  made ; nor 
shall  till  the  last  trump  shall  sound.”  The 
wights  then  (and  Christian-  in  chief)  grew  as 
if  they  would  give  up  hope,  and  did  look  this 
way  and  that,  but  no  way  could  be  found  by 
them  by  which  they  might  get  clear  of  the 
stream.  Then  they  did  ask  the  men  if  it  was 
all  the  same  depth.  They  said,  “ No  yet 
they  could  not  help  them  in  that  case ; “ for,” 
said  they,  “ you  shall  find  it  more  or  less  deep 
as  you  trust  in  the  King  of  the  place.” 

Then  they  did  wade  in  the  stream,  and  as 
Christian  sank  he  did  cry  to  his  good  friend 
Hopeful,  and  said,  “ I sink.” 

Then  said  Hopeful,  “ Be  of  good  cheer, 
my  friend  ; I feel  the  ground,  and  it  is  good.” 
Then  said  Christian,  “Ah  ! my  friend,  I shall 
not  see  the  land  I seek.”  And  with  that  all 
grew  dark,  and  fear  fell  on  Christian,  so  that 
he  could  not  see  in  front  of  him.  Here,  too, 
his  sense  left  him,  so  that  he  could  not  think, 
nor  well  talk,  of  one  of  those  sweet  joys  that 
he  had  met  with  in  the  way.  But  all  the 


214 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


words  that  he  spoke  still  did  tend  to  show 
that  he  had  dread  of  mind  and  fears  of  heart 
that  he  should  die  in  that  stream,  and  fail  to 
go  in  at  the  gate.  Here,  in  like  way,  as  they 
that  stood  by  saw,  the  thoughts  of  the  sins 
he  had  done,  both  since  and  erst  he  went  on 
the  way,  did  vex  him : so  did  the  sight  of 
fiends ; for  now'  and  then  he  would  show  so 
much  by  words.  Hopeful,  from  this  cause,  had 
here  hard  work  to  hold  up  the  head  of  his 
friend  ; yea,  at  times  he  would  be  quite  gone 
down,  and  then,  ere  a while,  he  would  rise  up 
once  more  half  dead.  Hopeful,  too,  would 
try  to  cheer  him,  and  said,  “Friend,  I see 
the  gate,  and  men  stand  by  to  greet  us  : ” but 
Christian  would  say,  “ ’Tis  you,  ^tis  you  they 
wait  for  ; you  have  had  hope  since  the  time  I 
knew  you.”  “ And  so  have  you,”  said  he  to 
Christian.  “ Ah,  friend,”  said  he,  “in  sooth 
if  I were  right.  He  would  now  rise  to  help 
me  ; but  for  my  sins  He  hath  brought  me  in 
this  snare,  and  hath  left  me.”  Then  said 
Hopeful,  “My  friend,  you  have  quite  lost 
sight  of  the  text  where  it  is  said  of  those 
that  do  ill,  ‘There  are  no  bands  in  their 


The  Land  of  Beulah. 


215 


death,  but  their  strength  is  firm,’  and  so 
forth.  These  fears  and  griefs  that  you  go 
through  are  no  sign  that  God  hath  left  you, 
, but  are  sent  to  try  you ; if  you  will  call  to 
mind  that  which  of  yore  you  have  had  from 
him,  and  live  on  him  in  your  griefs.” 

Then  I saw  in  my  dream  that  Christian 
.was  in  a muse  for  a while.  To  whom,  too. 
Hopeful  did  add  these  words,  “Be  of  good 
cheer,  Christ  doth  make  thee  whole.”  And 
with  that  Christian  brake  out  with  a loud 
voice,  “Oh,  I see  Him  once  more!  and  He 
tells  me,  ‘ When  thou  dost  pass  through  the 
stream,  I will  be  with  thee.’”  Then  they  both 
took  heart,  and  the  foe  then  grew  as  still  as  a 
stone,  till  they  were  gone  through.  Christian 
then  straight  found  ground  to  stand  on,  and 
so  it  came  to  pass  that  the  rest  of  the 
stream  was  but  of  slight  depth : thus  they 
did  ford  it. 

Now  on  the  bank  of  the  stream,  on  the  far 
off  side,  they  saw  the  two  Bright  Men  once 
more,  who  there  did  wait  for  them.  When 
they  came  out  of  the  stream  these  did  greet 
them,  and  said:  “We  are  sprites  sent  forth 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


216 


to  aid  them  who  shall  be  heirs  of  Christ.’* 
Thus  they  went  on  to  the  gate. 

Now  you  must  note  that  the  City  stood 
on  a high  hill : but  the  wights  went  up  that 
liill  with  ease,  for  that  they  had  these  two 
men  to  lead  them  up  by  the  arms  : more 
than  this,  they  had  left  the  garb  they  wore 
in  the  stream  ; for  though  they  went  in  with, 
them  they  came  out  freed  from  them.  They 
hence  went  up  here  with  much  speed,  though 
the  rise  on  which  the  City  was  built  was  more 
high  than  the  clouds.  They  then  went  up 
through  the  realms  of  air,  and  held  sweet  talk 
as  they  went,  as  they  felt  joy  for  that  they  had 
got  safe  through  the  stream,  and  had  such 
Tright  Ones  to  wait  on  them. 

The  talk  that  they  had  with  the  Bright 
Ones  was  of  the  sheen  of  the  place  ; who  told 
them  that  no  words  could  paint  it.  “You  go 
now,”  said  they,  “ to  the  sphere  where  God 
dwells,  in  which  you  shall  see  the  Tree  of 
Life,  and  eat  of  the  fruits  of  it  that  fade  not  ; 
and  when  you  come  there  you  shall  have 
white  rol^es  to  wear,  and  your  walk  and  talk 
shall  be  each  day  with  the  King,  while  time 


The  Land  of  Beulah. 


2 17 


shall  be  known  no  more.  There  you  shall 
not  see  such  things  as  you  saw  when  low  on 
earth,  to  wit,  grief,  pain,  and  death ; for  these 
things  are  gone.  You  now  go  to  Abraham, 
to  Isaac,  and  Jacob,  and  to  men  that  God 
‘ took  from  the  woe  to  come.”^  These  men 
then  did  ask,  “ What  must  we  do  in  this  pure 
place  ?"  To  whom  it  was  said,  “ You  must 
there  get  the  meed  of  all  your  toil,  and  have 
joy  for  all  your  grief ; you  must  reap  what 
you  have  sown,  ay,  the  fruit  of  all  your  tears 
and  toils  for  the  King  by  the  way.  In  that 
place  you  must  wear  crowns  of  gold,  and  bask 
for  aye  in  the  sight  of  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  for 
there  you  ‘ shall  see  Him  as  he  is.’  There,  too, 
you  shall  serve  Him  with  praise,  with  shouts, 
with  joy,  whom  you  sought  to  serve  in  the 
world,  though  with  much  pain,  for  that  your 
flesh  was  weak.  There  you  shall  join  with 
your  friends  once  more  that  are  gone  there  ere 
you  ; and  there  you  shall  with  joy  greet  each 
one  that  comes  in  your  wake.  When  the  King 
shall  come  with  sound  of  trump  in  the  clouds, 
as  on  the  wings  of  the  wind,  you  shall  come 
with  Him  ; and,  when  He  shall  sit  on  the 


2i8 


The  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


Throne  to  judge  all  the  realms  of  the  earth, 
you  shall  sit  by  Him  : yea,  and  when  He  shall 
pass  doom  on  all  that  did  work  ill,  let  them 
be  sprites  or  men,  you  shall  too  have  a voice 
in  that  doom,  for  that  they  are  His  and  your 
foes.  More  than  this,  when  He  shall  go  back 
to  the  City,  you  shall  go  too,  with  sound  of 
trump,  and  be  for  aye  with  Him." 

Now  while  they  thus  drew  nigh  to  the 
gate,  lo  a troop  of  the  Bright  Host  came  to 
meet  them  ; to  whom  it  was  said  by  the  first 
two  Bright  Ones,  “ These  are  the  men  that  did 
love  our  Lord,  when  they  were  in  the  world, 
and  that  have  left  all  for  His  name,  and  He 
hath  sent  us  to  fetch  them,  and  we  have 
brought  them  thus  far  on  their  way,  that  they 
may  go  in  and  look  their  Lord  in  the  face 
with  joy.”  There  came,  too,  at  this  time  to 
meet  them  a group  of  the  King’s  men  with 
trumps,  clad  in  white  and  sheen  robes,  who-, 
with  sweet  and  loud  notes,  made  the  whole 
arch  of  the  sky  full  of  the  sound.  These  men 
did  greet  Christian  and  his  friend  with  much 
warmth;  and  this  they  did  with  siiouts  and 
sound  of  trump. 


The  Land  of  Beulah. 


219 


This  done,  they  went  round  them  on  each 
side ; some  went  in  front,  some  in  the  rear, 
and  some  on  the  right  hand,  some  on  the  left 
(as  it  were  to  guard  them  through  the  vast 
realms),  and  did  sound  as  they  went,  with 
sweet  noise,  in  notes  on  high  ; so  that  the 
bare  sight  was  to  them  that  could  look  on  it 
as  if  all  the  blest  were  come  down  to  meet 
them.  Thus  then  did  they  walk  on  side  by 
side  ; and  as  they  did  walk,  now  and  then 
these  men  with  trumps  would,  as  they  did 
mix  their  notes  with  looks  and  becks,  show  to 
Christian  and  his  friend  how  glad  they  were 
to  be  with  them,  and  with  what  joy  they  came 
to  meet  them.  And  now  were  these  two  men, 
as  it  were,  in  bliss  ere  they  came  at  it.  Here, 
too,  they  had  the  City  in  view ; and  they 
thought  they  heard  all  the  bells  in  it  to  ring, 
so  as  to  greet  them.  But,  more  than  all,  the 
warm  and  rare  thoughts  that  they  had  of  the 
place  to  which  they  went,  and  of  those  that 
dwelt  there,  and  that  for  aye ; oh ! by  what 
tongue  or  pen  can  such  vast  joy  be  told? 
Thus  they  came  up  to  the  gate. 

Then  I saw  in  my  dream  that  the  Bright 


220 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


Men  bid  them  call  at  the  gate : the  which 
when  they  did,  some  from  on  high  did  look 
down,  to  wit,  Enoch,  Moses,  and  Elijah,  and 
so  forth,  to  whom  it  was  said,  “ These  wights 
are  come  from  the  City  of  Destruction,  for 
the  love  that  they  bear  to  the  King  of  this 
place  and  then  the  wights  gave  in  to  them 
each  man  his  roll,  which  they  had  got  at  first : 
those,  then,  were  brought  in  to  the  King, 
who,  when  he  had  read  them,  said,  “ Where 
are  the  men?”  To  whom  it  was  told,  “They 
are  at  the  porch  of  the  gate.”  Then  spoke  the 
King,  “ Ope  the  gate,  that  the  just  land  that 
keeps  truth  may  come  in.” 

Now  I saw  in  my  dream,  that  these  two 
men  went  in  at  the  gate  : and  lo  ! as  they  did 
so,  a change  came  on  them ; and  they  had 
robes  put  on  that  shone  like  gold.  There 
were,  too,  that  met  them  with  harps  and 
crowns,  and  gave  them  to  them  ; the  harps 
to  praise  with,  the  crowns  in  sign  of  rank. 
Then  I heard  in  my  dream  that  all  the  bells 
of  the  place  rang  for  joy,  and  that  it  was  said 
to  them,  “ Come  ye  to  the  joy  of  our  Lord.” 

Now,  just  as  the  gates  did  ope  to  let  in 


221 


The  Land  of  Beulah. 

the  men,  did  I peer  at  them,  and  lo  the  place 
shone  like  the  sun  : the  streets,  too,  were  of 
gold  ; and  in  them  did  walk  men  with  crowns 
on  their  heads,  palms  in  their  hands,  and  gold 
harps,  to  aid  in  songs  of  praise. 

There  were  some  of  them  that  had  wings, 
and  they  sang,  with  not  a pause,  songs  to  the 
“ Lamb  that  was  slain  !” 

Then  they  shut  up  the  gates  ; which  when 
I had  seen  I did  wish  to  be  with  them. 

Now,  while  I did  gaze  on  all  these  things, 
I gave  a turn  of  my  head  to  look  back,  and 
saw  Ignorance  come  up  to  the  side  of  the 
stream  : but  he  soon  got  through,  and  that 
void  of  half  the  toil  which  the  two  men  that 
I of  late  saw  met  with.  For  it  did  hap  that 
there  was  then  in  that  place  one  Vain-hope — 
who  plied  for  hire — that  with  his  boat  did 
help  him  through.  So  he,  as  those  I saw,  did 
climb  the  hill  to  come  up  to  the  gate ; but 
none  came  with  him,  nor  did  one  man  meet  or 
greet  him.  When  he  was  come  up  to  the 
gate,  he  gave  a look  up  at  what  was  writ  in 
front  of  it,  and  then  gave  a knock  : with  the 
thought  that  he  would  soon  be  let  in  ; but  the 


222 


The  Pilgrims  Progress. 


men  who  did  look  from  the  top  of  the  gate 
said,  “ Whence  come  you  ? and  what  would 
you  have  ?”  Quoth  he,  “ I did  eat  and  drink 
in  sight  of  the  King,  and  he  has  taught  in  our 
streets.”  Then  they  did  ask  for  his  roll,  that 
they  might  go  and  show  it  to  the  King.  So 
he  sought  in  his  breast  for  one,  and  found 
none.  Then  said  they,  “ Have  you  none  ?” 
But  the  man  said  not  a word.  So  they  told 
the  King,  but  he  would  not  come  down  to  see 
him  ; but  told  the  two  Bright  Ones,  that  led 
Christian  and  Hopeful  to  the  City,  to  go  out 
and  take  Ignorance,  and  bind  him  hand  and 
foot,  and  have  him  off.  Then  they  took  him 
up,  and  bore  him  through  the  air  to  the  door 
that  I saw  in  the  side  of  the  hill,  and  put  him 
in  there.  Then  I saw  that  there  was  a way 
to  hell,  ay,  from  the  gates  of  bliss,  as  well 
as  from  the  City  of  Destruction.  So  I did 
wake,  and  lo  it  was  a dream  ! 


THE  ENDl 


UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS-URBANA 


3 0112  042382413 


